User Manual - Szabo
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
User Manual
HLA FUSION™ SOFTWARE
Version 4.0
Catalog #: FUSPGR
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
1
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
All of One Lambda software products are designed to assist personnel experienced in HLA analysis by suggesting
typing results. However, any clinical or diagnostic results must be carefully reviewed by a person qualified in HLA
typing to assure correctness. This software may be used to aid in suggesting results, but should not be used as the
sole method for determining reportable results. This software is meant as a laboratory aid, not as a source of definitive results. The software design does not mitigate hazards associated with the software. The laboratory director or technologist trained in histocompatibility testing is required to review all data to detect any problems with
the software. Please note that this document was prepared in advance of the HLA Fusion software release. Therefore, you may notice slight differences in the content of the actual application screens.
For In Vitro Diagnostic Use.
21001 Kittridge Street,
Canoga Park, CA 91303-2801
Tel: 818.702.0042 • Fax: 818.702.6904
www.onelambda.com
© 2015 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. All rights reserved. Luminex is a trademark of Luminex Corporation. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks
are the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific and its subsidiaries. Specifications, terms and pricing are subject to change. Not all products are available in all countries. Please consult your local sales representative for details.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
2
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................................... 14
WHAT IS HLA FUSION™ SOFTWARE? ......................................................................................................................................... 14
PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION AND UPDATE FILES ................................................................................................................ 15
PROGRAM UPDATES ............................................................................................................................................................ 16
LIMITATIONS OF THE PROGRAM.......................................................................................................................................... 17
TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................................................................................................................................................... 18
SCOPE OF THIS MANUAL...................................................................................................................................................... 19
NAVIGATION........................................................................................................................................................................ 20
LOGGING ON TO FUSION ..................................................................................................................................................... 21
RETRIEVING A FORGOTTEN USER NAME OR PASSWORD .................................................................................................................. 22
KEY SYSTEM SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................................................... 23
SCREEN RESOLUTION ............................................................................................................................................................. 23
FILE PERMISSIONS ................................................................................................................................................................. 24
USER INTERFACE .................................................................................................................................................................. 25
FUSION HOME PAGES ............................................................................................................................................................ 25
LAUNCHING NAVIGATOR ......................................................................................................................................................... 27
Navigator Tree ............................................................................................................................................................. 27
RESULTS GROUPING .............................................................................................................................................................. 28
Group by Product ......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Group by Catalog ......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Group by Test Date....................................................................................................................................................... 29
ACCESSING HLA FUSION™ SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................... 30
MAIN MENU OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................... 30
Analyze Data................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Reports ........................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Data............................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Sample......................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Patient Info .................................................................................................................................................................. 31
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
3
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Profile .......................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Utilities ........................................................................................................................................................................ 31
Help ............................................................................................................................................................................. 31
Exit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 32
Toolbar Buttons............................................................................................................................................................ 32
Print Report.................................................................................................................................................................. 34
Preview Report............................................................................................................................................................. 35
Print Screen.................................................................................................................................................................. 35
Magnify ....................................................................................................................................................................... 36
Show Navigator............................................................................................................................................................ 36
Patient/Donor Information ........................................................................................................................................... 37
Related Records ........................................................................................................................................................... 38
Side-by-Side Analysis .................................................................................................................................................... 38
PRODUCT DATA ANALYSIS ....................................................................................................................................................... 39
Sample Navigation ....................................................................................................................................................... 39
Sample Date................................................................................................................................................................. 40
LABTYPE ANALYSIS............................................................................................................................................................... 41
START LABTYPE ANALYSIS.................................................................................................................................................... 43
IMPORTING LABTYPE SESSION DATA (NON HD) .......................................................................................................................... 43
ACQUIRING LABTYPE SESSION DATA (HD) ................................................................................................................................. 49
ANALYZING EXON 4+ SESSIONS............................................................................................................................................ 54
LABTYPE SESSION SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................................. 57
The Session Summary Field Chooser.............................................................................................................................. 57
The Batch Print Screen Function.................................................................................................................................... 58
Export, Preview and Print Buttons................................................................................................................................. 58
LABTYPE SESSION SUMMARY TABS ........................................................................................................................................... 60
Summary Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 60
Control Value Tab......................................................................................................................................................... 61
The Positive Control Summary ...................................................................................................................................... 61
Negative Control Summary........................................................................................................................................... 62
Bead Count Summary................................................................................................................................................... 62
THE BEAD ANALYSIS TAB ........................................................................................................................................................ 63
False Reaction Summary............................................................................................................................................... 63
GENERAL SESSION SUMMARY FEATURES ..................................................................................................................................... 67
Excluding a Sample from Analysis................................................................................................................................. 69
CONFIGURE LABTYPE ANALYSIS FOR THE CURRENT SAMPLE ............................................................................................... 70
CHANGE CONFIGURATION FOR THE CURRENT SAMPLE .................................................................................................................... 70
Assign Code.................................................................................................................................................................. 71
Bw4/Bw6 in Serology.................................................................................................................................................... 71
Demographic Information ............................................................................................................................................ 72
Minimum Positive Control ............................................................................................................................................ 72
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
4
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Minimum Bead Count................................................................................................................................................... 73
Set Sure Reaction Bead................................................................................................................................................. 73
View QC ....................................................................................................................................................................... 74
Low Positive Threshold Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 74
USING THE LABTYPE DATA ANALYSIS WINDOW................................................................................................................... 75
KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS FOR LABTYPE ANALYSIS NAVIGATION .......................................................................................................... 79
QUADRANT 1 (QC HISTOGRAM)............................................................................................................................................... 79
QC Tab ......................................................................................................................................................................... 79
Rxn (Reaction)Tab ........................................................................................................................................................ 80
Rec (Recognition) Site Tab ............................................................................................................................................ 82
The Recognition Bar ..................................................................................................................................................... 84
Local QC Tab ................................................................................................................................................................ 85
Patient/Sample Results Tab.......................................................................................................................................... 85
QUADRANT 2(BEAD DATA) ..................................................................................................................................................... 86
Bead Tab...................................................................................................................................................................... 86
Raw Tab....................................................................................................................................................................... 89
Bead Info Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 90
QUADRANT 3(REACTION PROFILE) ............................................................................................................................................ 91
The Reaction Profile ..................................................................................................................................................... 91
QUADRANT 4....................................................................................................................................................................... 94
The Pairs Tab ............................................................................................................................................................... 95
Assign an Allele Pair from the Suggested List ................................................................................................................ 96
Double-click on an allele pair under the Pairs tab to assign it to the final allele pairs assignment area. ........ 96
Manually Assign an Allele Pair...................................................................................................................................... 97
Force Tab ..................................................................................................................................................................... 97
Type/Subtype Tab ........................................................................................................................................................ 98
Match Tab.................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Sero Tab....................................................................................................................................................................... 99
Exclude Exon 3 Probes for a Locus............................................................................................................................... 100
Allele Code Assignment .............................................................................................................................................. 101
Allele Code Assignment .............................................................................................................................................. 102
Manual Allele Code Assignment.................................................................................................................................. 102
Other Assignment....................................................................................................................................................... 104
Reanalyze................................................................................................................................................................... 105
Analyze Combined LABType Sessions .......................................................................................................................... 105
Adding User Comments to Samples ............................................................................................................................ 106
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing......................................................................................................................... 107
Assigning Serology and Allele Code Results to a Patient .............................................................................................. 107
Preview or Print Reports ............................................................................................................................................. 108
Assign Coded Results.................................................................................................................................................. 109
Translate.................................................................................................................................................................... 109
Save Assignments....................................................................................................................................................... 109
Confirm Assignments.................................................................................................................................................. 110
NAVIGATOR RIGHT-CLICK MENU OPTIONS FOR LABTYPE................................................................................................... 111
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
5
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
SESSION-LEVEL OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................................................... 111
Create Lab QC ............................................................................................................................................................ 111
Session Review ........................................................................................................................................................... 112
Reanalyze with New Nomenclature ............................................................................................................................ 113
SAMPLE-LEVEL OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................................................... 113
Related Records ......................................................................................................................................................... 114
Side By Side Analysis................................................................................................................................................... 114
MICRO SSP ANALYSIS......................................................................................................................................................... 116
START MICRO SSP ANALYSIS .............................................................................................................................................. 117
CONFIGURE MICRO SSP DATA ANALYSIS............................................................................................................................ 121
Assign Code................................................................................................................................................................ 121
Bw4/Bw6 in Serology.................................................................................................................................................. 122
Demographic Information .......................................................................................................................................... 122
USING THE MICRO SSP ANALYSIS WINDOW....................................................................................................................... 123
Test Gel Pane ............................................................................................................................................................. 124
View Well Details ....................................................................................................................................................... 126
Working with Gel Images ........................................................................................................................................... 126
Add Samples .............................................................................................................................................................. 128
Rxn (Reaction) Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 130
Number of Allowable False Reactions ......................................................................................................................... 132
Force One False Reaction............................................................................................................................................ 132
MICRO SSP COMBINED ANALYSIS ...................................................................................................................................... 133
MAKE TYPING ASSIGNMENTS IN MICRO SSP ANALYSIS...................................................................................................... 135
Assign an Allele Pair from the Suggested List .............................................................................................................. 136
Match Tab.................................................................................................................................................................. 136
Manual Allele Pair Assignment ................................................................................................................................... 137
Possible Allele Codes .................................................................................................................................................. 137
Allele Code Assignment .............................................................................................................................................. 138
Manual Allele Code Assignment.................................................................................................................................. 138
Unknown Allele Codes ................................................................................................................................................ 139
Other Assignment....................................................................................................................................................... 141
Possible Serology Field................................................................................................................................................ 141
Translate (noncurrent nomenclature format only)....................................................................................................... 142
Adding Comments to Samples .................................................................................................................................... 142
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing......................................................................................................................... 143
Printing the Current Analysis Window......................................................................................................................... 143
Preview or Print Reports ............................................................................................................................................. 144
Assign Coded Results.................................................................................................................................................. 144
Save Assignments....................................................................................................................................................... 144
Confirm Assignments.................................................................................................................................................. 145
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
6
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
MICRO SSP SESSION SUMMARY......................................................................................................................................... 146
NAVIGATOR RIGHT-CLICK MENU OPTIONS FOR MICRO SSP............................................................................................... 148
SESSION-LEVEL OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................................................... 148
Reanalyze with New Nomenclature ............................................................................................................................ 148
Sample-Level Options ................................................................................................................................................. 149
Related Records ......................................................................................................................................................... 149
Side By Side Analysis................................................................................................................................................... 149
LABSCREEN ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................................................ 151
STARTING LABSCREEN ANALYSIS ....................................................................................................................................... 152
ACQUIRING LABSCREEN SESSION DATA.................................................................................................................................... 152
LABSCREEN SESSION SUMMARY SCREEN .................................................................................................................................. 157
USING THE LABSCREEN MIXED ANALYSIS WINDOW........................................................................................................... 159
FIND ANTIGEN.................................................................................................................................................................... 160
VIEW MOLECULAR TYPING FOR ANTIGENS................................................................................................................................. 161
View MIC Antibody Screening Results ......................................................................................................................... 162
Adjust Cut-offs ........................................................................................................................................................... 162
Graph Raw................................................................................................................................................................. 163
Raw Data Table.......................................................................................................................................................... 164
Raw Data Report........................................................................................................................................................ 164
Making Assignments .................................................................................................................................................. 165
Saving Assignments.................................................................................................................................................... 166
CONFIRMING ASSIGNMENTS .................................................................................................................................................. 166
ADDING COMMENTS TO SAMPLES ........................................................................................................................................... 166
FLAGGING A SAMPLE FOR FURTHER TESTING .............................................................................................................................. 167
Printing the Current Analysis Window......................................................................................................................... 167
PREVIEWING AND PRINTING REPORTS ...................................................................................................................................... 167
USING THE LABSCREEN PRA, SINGLE ANTIGEN & SINGLES ANALYSIS WINDOW ................................................................. 169
CREG TABLE ..................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Find Antigen............................................................................................................................................................... 171
Change the Lab Scale.................................................................................................................................................. 172
View Molecular Specificities........................................................................................................................................ 173
Adjust Cut-offs ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
Select Minimum Positive Threshold............................................................................................................................. 174
Change Normalization Formula .................................................................................................................................. 174
Exclude Antigen(s) from Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 174
Include/Exclude Cw .................................................................................................................................................... 175
Reset All Options to Default........................................................................................................................................ 176
Force Positive............................................................................................................................................................. 176
Graph Raw................................................................................................................................................................. 176
Raw Data Table.......................................................................................................................................................... 177
Raw Data Report........................................................................................................................................................ 177
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
7
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Displaying DSA (Donor Specific Antigen)Match/Mismatch........................................................................................... 178
Adding Comments to Samples .................................................................................................................................... 179
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing......................................................................................................................... 179
Printing the Current Analysis Window......................................................................................................................... 179
Previewing and Printing Reports................................................................................................................................. 179
Making Final Assignments.......................................................................................................................................... 180
Manual Assignments.................................................................................................................................................. 180
Assigning Negative Sample Values.............................................................................................................................. 181
Removing Assignments............................................................................................................................................... 181
Saving Assignments.................................................................................................................................................... 181
Confirming Assignments............................................................................................................................................. 182
Getting Tail Analysis Values (Except Singles) ............................................................................................................... 182
Donor PRA (Except Singles)......................................................................................................................................... 182
Calculated PRA........................................................................................................................................................... 183
Choosing Minimum Positive Threshold Cutoffs (Except Singles) ................................................................................... 184
Hiding Tail Analysis Values (Single Antigen) ................................................................................................................ 184
Navigating Between Class I and Class II (PRA Class I and II Combined) ......................................................................... 184
Sort Antigen (Single Antigen)...................................................................................................................................... 184
NAVIGATOR RIGHT-CLICK MENU OPTIONS FOR LABSCREEN .............................................................................................. 187
Reanalyze with New Settings/Catalog......................................................................................................................... 187
Sample-Level Options ................................................................................................................................................. 188
Related Records ......................................................................................................................................................... 188
Side-By-Side Analysis.................................................................................................................................................. 188
LAT ANALYSIS..................................................................................................................................................................... 190
STARTING LAT ANALYSIS.................................................................................................................................................... 191
ACQUIRING LAT SESSION DATA .............................................................................................................................................. 191
Single Session Manual Entry ....................................................................................................................................... 192
Manual Batch Entry.................................................................................................................................................... 193
IMPORTING CSV FILES IN LAT ................................................................................................................................................ 194
USING THE LAT MIXED ANALYSIS WINDOW....................................................................................................................... 199
Entering Data and Reaction Pattern ........................................................................................................................... 200
USING THE ELISA READER .................................................................................................................................................... 201
Making Assignments .................................................................................................................................................. 202
Save Assignments....................................................................................................................................................... 202
CONFIRM ASSIGNMENTS ....................................................................................................................................................... 203
Adding Comments to Samples .................................................................................................................................... 203
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing......................................................................................................................... 203
Adding Tray Information ............................................................................................................................................ 204
Exporting Session Data............................................................................................................................................... 204
Raw Data Table.......................................................................................................................................................... 204
Raw Data Quick Report .............................................................................................................................................. 205
Printing the Current Analysis Window......................................................................................................................... 206
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
8
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Previewing and Printing Reports................................................................................................................................. 206
USING THE LAT PRA/SINGLE ANTIGEN ANALYSIS WINDOW ............................................................................................... 207
ENTERING THE REACTION PATTERN ......................................................................................................................................... 207
USING THE ELISA READER .................................................................................................................................................... 209
LAT PRA/SINGLE ANTIGEN HISTOGRAM .................................................................................................................................. 209
CREG Table................................................................................................................................................................. 210
Find Antigen............................................................................................................................................................... 210
View Molecular Specificities........................................................................................................................................ 211
Select Minimum Positive Threshold............................................................................................................................. 211
Exclude Antigen from Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 211
Include/Exclude Cw .................................................................................................................................................... 212
NAVIGATING BETWEEN CLASS I & CLASS II ................................................................................................................................ 212
(PRA Class I & II Combined)......................................................................................................................................... 212
Raw Data Table.......................................................................................................................................................... 213
Raw Data Report........................................................................................................................................................ 213
Exporting Session Data............................................................................................................................................... 213
Donor PRA.................................................................................................................................................................. 213
Calculated PRA........................................................................................................................................................... 214
Adding Comments to Samples .................................................................................................................................... 214
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing......................................................................................................................... 215
Previewing and Printing Reports................................................................................................................................. 215
MAKING FINAL ASSIGNMENTS ................................................................................................................................................ 215
Manual Assignments.................................................................................................................................................. 216
Assigning Negative Sample Values.............................................................................................................................. 216
Removing Assignments............................................................................................................................................... 216
Save Assignments....................................................................................................................................................... 217
CONFIRM ASSIGNMENTS ....................................................................................................................................................... 217
Getting Tail Analysis Values........................................................................................................................................ 217
NAVIGATING BETWEEN CLASS I & CLASS II ................................................................................................................................ 218
(PRA Class I and II Combined) ..................................................................................................................................... 218
NAVIGATOR RIGHT-CLICK MENU OPTIONS FOR LAT........................................................................................................... 219
Reanalyze with New Catalog ...................................................................................................................................... 219
SAMPLE-LEVEL OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................................................... 220
Related Records ......................................................................................................................................................... 220
Side By Side Analysis................................................................................................................................................... 220
FLOWPRA ANALYSIS........................................................................................................................................................... 221
STARTING FLOWPRA ANALYSIS.......................................................................................................................................... 221
ACQUIRING FLOWPRA DATA ................................................................................................................................................. 221
FLOWPRA ANALYSIS SCREENS ............................................................................................................................................... 224
LCT ANALYSIS..................................................................................................................................................................... 225
STARTING LCT ANALYSIS .................................................................................................................................................... 226
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
9
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
ACQUIRING LCT DATA ......................................................................................................................................................... 226
LCT SESSION SUMMARY SCREEN ............................................................................................................................................ 228
USING THE LCT ANALYSIS WINDOW................................................................................................................................... 231
REACTION INPUT AND ANALYSIS PANE ...................................................................................................................................... 232
Adding Tray Information ............................................................................................................................................ 232
Find Antigen............................................................................................................................................................... 233
CREG Table................................................................................................................................................................. 233
Sort by Well Position .................................................................................................................................................. 234
Select Minimum Positive Threshold............................................................................................................................. 235
Exclude Antigen from Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 235
Include/Exclude Cw .................................................................................................................................................... 236
Raw Data Table.......................................................................................................................................................... 236
Raw Data Report........................................................................................................................................................ 237
Donor PRA.................................................................................................................................................................. 237
Calculated PRA........................................................................................................................................................... 238
Adding Comments to Samples .................................................................................................................................... 238
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing......................................................................................................................... 239
Printing the Current Analysis Window......................................................................................................................... 239
PREVIEWING AND PRINTING REPORTS ...................................................................................................................................... 240
MAKING FINAL ASSIGNMENTS ................................................................................................................................................ 240
Manual Assignments.................................................................................................................................................. 240
Assigning Negative Sample Values.............................................................................................................................. 241
Removing Assignments............................................................................................................................................... 241
Saving Assignments.................................................................................................................................................... 241
Confirming Assignments............................................................................................................................................. 241
NAVIGATOR RIGHT-CLICK MENU OPTIONS FOR LCT SESSIONS........................................................................................... 242
Reanalyze with New Catalog ...................................................................................................................................... 242
SAMPLE-LEVEL OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................................................... 243
Related Records ......................................................................................................................................................... 243
Side By Side Analysis................................................................................................................................................... 243
REPORTS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 244
USING THE REPORTS WINDOW.......................................................................................................................................... 245
Accessing the Reports Window ................................................................................................................................... 245
Select Report Type...................................................................................................................................................... 246
Refine Report Input .................................................................................................................................................... 246
Session/Sample Selection ........................................................................................................................................... 247
View, Print or Export Reports...................................................................................................................................... 248
Export Report............................................................................................................................................................. 250
Accessing Reports from the My Favorite Menu ........................................................................................................... 250
Removing Reports from My Favorite........................................................................................................................... 251
REPORTS TOOLS................................................................................................................................................................. 252
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
10
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
CUSTOMIZING REPORT APPEARANCE ....................................................................................................................................... 252
Creating Custom Data Export Templates..................................................................................................................... 253
Creating Custom Reports............................................................................................................................................ 254
Custom Molecular and Antibody Report Setup ............................................................................................................ 255
SAMPLE SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................................................. 256
MOLECULAR TYPING SAMPLE SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................. 256
Antibody Screening Sample Summary......................................................................................................................... 257
VIEW RECORDS .................................................................................................................................................................. 258
PATIENT INFO .................................................................................................................................................................... 259
AUDIT TRAIL REPORT ........................................................................................................................................................... 260
REPORT TYPES.................................................................................................................................................................... 262
DATA MANAGEMENT......................................................................................................................................................... 266
SESSION MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................................................................... 267
MANAGE SESSION DATA WINDOW ......................................................................................................................................... 267
SAMPLE MANAGEMENT..................................................................................................................................................... 269
IMPORTING SAMPLE LISTS................................................................................................................................................. 269
INFORMATION FORMATS FOR SAMPLE LISTS .................................................................................................................... 270
New packing list format.............................................................................................................................................. 270
Pack list: Old Standard ‘X’ samples ............................................................................................................................. 270
Old packing list format, '11' for AB/DR samples .......................................................................................................... 270
Comma-Delimited Format .......................................................................................................................................... 271
Tab-Delimited Format ................................................................................................................................................ 271
SDF Format ................................................................................................................................................................ 271
Local/Sample/Patient ID Only..................................................................................................................................... 271
VIEWING AND EDITING SAMPLE INFORMATION ........................................................................................................................... 272
TEST LISTS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 273
Creating New Test Lists .............................................................................................................................................. 273
Viewing and Editing Existing Test Lists ........................................................................................................................ 274
Deleting Existing Test Lists.......................................................................................................................................... 274
Exporting Test Lists..................................................................................................................................................... 274
LUMINEX LISTS................................................................................................................................................................... 276
CREATING LUMINEX LISTS ..................................................................................................................................................... 276
Create Sample Worklists............................................................................................................................................. 276
Create Plate Design .................................................................................................................................................... 277
PATIENT INFORMATION..................................................................................................................................................... 284
IMPORTING PATIENT/DONOR LISTS................................................................................................................................... 284
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
11
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
MANAGING PATIENT/DONOR RECORDS............................................................................................................................ 285
ADDING NEW PATIENT/DONOR RECORDS ................................................................................................................................. 285
Lookup Patient/Donor Records ................................................................................................................................... 286
Editing Patient/Donor Records.................................................................................................................................... 287
Associating a Patient/Donor ID with Sample IDs ......................................................................................................... 288
Translating Associated Patient/Donor Results to New Allele Code ............................................................................... 288
Associating Patient and Donor Records....................................................................................................................... 289
Associating a Donor with Donor PRA Results............................................................................................................... 289
Printing Patient/Donor Records .................................................................................................................................. 290
Exporting Patient/Donor Records................................................................................................................................ 290
Archiving Patient/Donor Records................................................................................................................................ 291
Deleting Patient/Donor Records ................................................................................................................................. 291
Creating Patient/Donor Lists....................................................................................................................................... 292
Calculated PRA........................................................................................................................................................... 294
PATIENT ANTIBODY TRACKING .......................................................................................................................................... 296
PROFILE MANAGEMENT..................................................................................................................................................... 301
Viewing the User List.................................................................................................................................................. 302
Adding New Users ...................................................................................................................................................... 302
Editing User Profiles ................................................................................................................................................... 302
Changing Passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 303
Resetting Passwords................................................................................................................................................... 303
Changing User Privileges ............................................................................................................................................ 303
Inactivating Users....................................................................................................................................................... 304
LAB PROFILE....................................................................................................................................................................... 304
Editing the Lab Profile ................................................................................................................................................ 305
Managing Lab Codes.................................................................................................................................................. 305
UTILITIES............................................................................................................................................................................ 306
MANAGING CATALOG REFERENCE FILES.................................................................................................................................... 306
Updating Catalog Files from a Local or Network Drive................................................................................................. 306
UPDATING CATALOG FILES FROM THE ONE LAMBDA DOWNLOAD SITE ............................................................................................. 308
UPDATING MOLECULAR TYPING REFERENCE FILES............................................................................................................. 310
Updating NMDP Codes from a Local or Network Drive ................................................................................................ 310
Updating NMDP Files from the NMDP Website........................................................................................................... 311
Creating a Local Code File........................................................................................................................................... 311
Updating the Local Code File ...................................................................................................................................... 312
Updating Serology Equivalent File from One Lambda Website..................................................................................... 312
CATALOG MANAGEMENT AND INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................ 313
Archive Catalogs ........................................................................................................................................................ 313
Un-Archive Files.......................................................................................................................................................... 315
Viewing Catalog File Information................................................................................................................................ 315
Deleting Catalog File Information ............................................................................................................................... 315
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
12
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Reporting Catalog File Information ............................................................................................................................. 316
Associating Product Catalog Files and Luminex Templates .......................................................................................... 316
Importing Allele Frequency Files (Demographic Frequency) ......................................................................................... 317
UPDATING ALLELE FREQUENCY FILES (DEMOGRAPHIC FREQUENCY) ................................................................................................. 318
MANAGING CREG LIST INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................................... 320
CHANGING PRODUCT CONFIGURATION SETTINGS............................................................................................................. 321
CHANGING MOLECULAR PRODUCT CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................................... 321
Creating a Combined LABScreen Session Catalog ........................................................................................................ 323
Changing LABScreen Default Negative Serum ............................................................................................................. 324
Changing LABScreen Mixed Product Configuration...................................................................................................... 324
Changing Antibody Screening Analysis Configuration.................................................................................................. 325
Importing NS Files ...................................................................................................................................................... 326
CHOOSING GENERAL SETTINGS.......................................................................................................................................... 327
Printer Defaults.......................................................................................................................................................... 327
SETTING HLA FUSION DEFAULT URLS AND DIRECTORY PATHS ....................................................................................................... 328
ACTIVATING PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................................ 329
SOFTWARE VALIDATION .................................................................................................................................................... 330
IQ (INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION) ......................................................................................................................................... 330
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
13
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Introduction
™
What is HLA Fusion Software?
HLA Fusion Software is a companion to One Lambda’s molecular typing and antibody screening
products. This software runs in both stand-alone (on a single computer) and network environments.
The features of this software allow you to do the following:

Import raw data from the LABScan 100 flow analyzer

Manually enter reaction patterns for Micro SSP and LABScan 3D, FlowPRA, LAT and LCT
products

Read ELISA results for LAT products

Analyze the raw data and review the results in graphical form

Adjust cut-off values to clarify the results

Easily update product information, (i.e., new product and lot information)

Search for specific data and create standard or custom reports
Note:
Make sure you have downloaded the most up to date Nomenclature and/or Serology
Equivalent files before you import catalogs or attempt to analyze sessions/samples.
Also, please make sure your collation of SQL Server matches the collation of client
instances, (a collation encodes the rules governing the proper use of characters for a
language or an alphabet). If you are not certain, please verify with your system/database
administrator.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
14
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Product Documentation and Update Files
The HLA Fusion help contains the most current HLA Fusion information and procedures. It is
accessible from within the Fusion software application by pressing the F1 key or by selecting Help :
HLA Fusion Help. The most recent copy of the HLA Fusion help file can also be downloaded from
the OLI download website. Simply download the latest help file and copy it into your local Fusion
installation help folder, replacing the existing file ending in extension .CHM.
While this document, the HLA Fusion User Manual, is kept as current as possible, it must be delivered
well in advance of the software in order to allow for translations.
Generally, product update information, such as new features and issue resolution is located in the HLA
Fusion Release Notes. If a software release is minor and the release notes are not updated, a README
file is provided with a list of changes to the software and pertinent information that is not yet included
in the user’s manual.
In addition, you can always access the most current product update information from the Help >
Product Update Notes menu option within the HLA Fusion Software application, or from the OLI
download site.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
15
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Program Updates
Note:
For best results, always make sure you are using the latest version of HLA Fusion™
Software.
HLA Fusion will automatically (if configured) detect if there is a software update/patch available and
inform you of the availability. You may also obtain updates of HLA Fusion by request. Please contact
your One Lambda, Inc. representative for a copy of the software, or see the Technical Support section
below for more contact information. Product information updates, (catalog files, etc.) for HLA Fusion
are available through your One Lambda Inc. representative, or from the One Lambda website:
http://download.onelambda.com
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
16
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Limitations of the Program
All One Lambda software products are designed to assist personnel experienced in HLA analysis by
suggesting typing and antibody screening results. However, results must be carefully reviewed by a
person qualified in HLA typing or antibody screening to assure correctness. This software may be
used to aid in suggesting results, but should not be used as the sole method for determining
reportable results. This software is meant as a laboratory aid, not as a source of definitive results.
For the reliability of patient information stored in the database, users must ensure that the identifier
for each patient is unique and that each sample identifier is unique. The storage capacity of HLA
Fusion is limited by your version of Microsoft SQL Server. Please see the Fusion Database Utility
Users Guide, or the Microsoft website, (www.microsoft.com) for more information about the storage
capacity of the various versions of SQL Server.
HLA Fusion assumes that data for each required input is in standard format that has not been
modified. Raw data files must be in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) file format and must follow
these guidelines:

The data file is a CSV generated by LABScan 100, using software versions 2.3 or xPONENT 3.1
or xPONENT 4.2.

All HD products must be acquired on software version 2.3, or xPONENT 3.1 or xPONENT
4.2.

The data file name,(also known as a Session ID) must be 40 characters or less in length and
include the .csv file extension.

The data is generated based on original, unmodified templates provided by One Lambda, Inc.

The user is responsible for final assignments and must review all suggested results.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
17
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Technical Support
For technical support or to report software problems, contact your One Lambda representative. From
the United States, call 800-822-8824, or in the Greater Los Angeles Area, call 818-702-0042. Contact
us by e-mail at: [email protected]
For system requirements, see the HLA Fusion Software Installation Guide.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
18
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Scope of this Manual
This manual provides information on how to import raw data, make changes in cut-off values and other
configuration and control adjustments as necessary for analysis, as well as how to track and report
analysis results. It is very important to recognize that the QC, (Quality Control) data used with this
program and the defaults set in this program are based on One Lambda’s experience with the product in
a tightly-controlled research and development environment. Thus, a laboratory performing HLA typing
or antibody screening in another environment may need to reset cut-off values to meet specific
laboratory requirements.
From the Main Menu of HLA Fusion, you can access the three major components of the program:

Analyze Data

Reports

Manage Records

Manage Samples
In addition, you may also access the following features:

Patient Information

Utilities

Help

Exit
This manual helps you start using One Lambda’s HLA Fusion. It includes an overview of the system and
then takes you into the process of analyzing data.
See the HLA Fusion Software Installation Guide for installation instructions.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
19
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Navigation
This section describes the various ways to access the HLA Fusion software menus and functions, as
well as how to use the Navigator tool to access and move between sessions and samples.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
20
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Logging on to Fusion
1. Double-click the HLA Fusion Icon
on your computer desktop. You can also open the
program from the Windows menu: Start > Programs > One Lambda > HLA Fusion.
The Security Login dialog box is displayed.
The Fusion Security Login Screen
Version of SQL
Server used
Database that
Fusion is using
Database
Collation
Enter your HLA Fusion User Name and Password.
Click the Log In
Note:
button to open the program. A message asks you to wait.
The Database field displays the database to which you are currently connected.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
21
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Retrieving a Forgotten User Name or Password

If you forget your HLA Fusion User Name, click the Forgot User Name link, enter your first
and last name and select your lab role, (supervisor or technician). The system displays the
user name matching the data you provide:

If you forget your HLA Fusion password, click the Forgot Password link and answer the
two security questions you were asked when you set up your user profile.

The password is displayed when the questions are answered correctly.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
22
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Key System Settings
Screen Resolution
HLA Fusion software requires a screen resolution of 1280 x 960. The software displays a message if
your current resolution is less than the expected settings.
Note:
You can choose to suppress this message through the Edit link on the General
Configurations section of the Home page.
Minimum Screen Resolution
You can select Yes to have the continue to start the application. Or, you can select No to exit the
program.
In addition, if your computer is running Microsoft® Windows 7® or Windows 8®, the text display size
setting must be set to Smaller - 100% (default). Take these steps if you need to adjust this setting:
1. Right-click on the computer desktop. Select the Screen Resolution option.
The Screen Resolution window displays.
Windows 7 Screen Resolution window
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
23
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Select the Make text and other items larger or smaller, (see previous).
2. Select Smaller sized text.
Windows - Selecting Smaller
File Permissions
All HLA Fusion users must have read and write permissions to the following directories and files:

C:\Program Files (x86)\One Lamda\

OneLambda.Fusion.Interface.exe.config

ReportMap.xml

C:\OLI Fusion\(and all the sub directories and the files in these directories)
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
24
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
User Interface
Fusion Home Pages
Opens the Navigator
Search Criteria
window
Notifies of Catalog
Updates
The Fusion
Explorer –
click any
button to
open the
corresponding product
Opens the Fusion setup window for general, (audit trail,
auto-download enable, patient ty pe, etc.) printer, URL’s
and directory path setup
Opens the
Users Info
S cr e e n
Opens the Catalog
Management window
Opens the
printer setup
window
Opens the Reference
File Update window
Green if Audit
Logging is on,
Red if it’s o ff
Status Bar
This user interface option gives you access to the individual product home pages, import data and view
analysis windows. It also allows you to view or access system or product data, reference file downloads
and configuration settings.
This interface is what you will see when you first log in to HLA Fusion if the default configuration is set.
Note:
If the current page does not show updated information upon modifications or downloads,
go back to the main Home page, then return to the product home page to see the
changes.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
25
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To display the home page for one of the products listed in the bottom left area of the page, click the
button or menu option. For LABScreen:

From the main Fusion home page, click the LABScreen button, or
click the LABScreen button on the HLA Fusion toolbar at the top of
the screen.
OR,

Select Analyze Data > LABScreen from the Fusion Menu Bar.
Notice how the screen changes to fit the selected One Lambda product?
Note:
Migrated and upgraded databases also use the same interface.
If you want to make one of the product home pages the default home page so that each time you login to
HLA Fusion, that particular home page is displayed, do the following:
1. On the top second row of the screen, click the
button.
OR,
2. Click the word Utilities on the Fusion Taskbar.
3. On the General Settings tab, click the drop-down
arrow and select from the drop-down list in the
Default Home Page field to select your default home
page.
4. Click Save and then Close.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
26
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Launching Navigator
If the Navigator tab is not already displayed on the right of the application window, click the
Show Navigator toolbar button to activate the Navigator function,
Or,
Move your cursor over the Navigator tab on the right border of the
application window to slide the Navigator into view.
The Fusion Navigator Tree
Navigator Tree
Using the Navigator tree, you can easily move between
analysis products, sessions, samples and test dates.
Note:
Double-click on a session, or click the + sign to the left of the Catalog, Date or Product
module to display the list of sessions.
HLA Fusion
Products
Sessions
in the
Navigator
Click a sample name to display it in the analysis window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
27
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Results Grouping
The sessions and samples displayed though the Navigator tool can be sorted by various criteria:

Product type

Session Date

Catalog

Test Date
The default is to group by Product. See the next few sections for details about the various display
options.
Group by Product
Reviewed/Unreviewed Sessions
Sessions not
yet analyzed
are BLUE.
Analyzed
sessions are
BLACK.
The Navigator displays imported sessions for each product type,
based on the date range and other criteria set in the Find
option. If you are already in the analysis mode for a certain
product, just the sessions that fit within the date range for that
product will display.
Click the + sign next to the product type you are interested in to
display its sessions.


The sessions displayed in blue are the ones that have not yet been
analyzed. Once you analyze a session, its color on the Navigator list
changes to black.
Click a session name to display the samples within that session. For LABType and LABScreen, the
system also performs a batch analysis and displays the results in
Sample Failed in Batch Analysis
the Session Summary.
If a session sample is listed in Red, it means the
sample failed in the Analysis.

Click a Sample Name to display it in an analysis
window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
28
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Group by Catalog
Group by Catalog
When you select the Catalog group option in the Navigator,
sessions are displayed in alphanumeric order by
Catalog Name.
Group by Test Date
When you select the Test Date group option, sessions are displayed in
chronological order by their test dates.
Otherwise, the use of this tool is the same as described previously in Group
by Product.
Group by Session Date
When you select the Session Date option, sessions are displayed in order of
their creation dates.
Otherwise, the use of this tool is the same as described above in Group by Product
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
29
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
™
Accessing HLA Fusion Software Functions
Main Menu Options
Options on the Fusion Menu Bar
You can access HLA Fusion functionality at any time from the toolbar’s Main Menu, which is displayed
at the top of all HLA Fusion application windows. See the following sections for a list of the options
available under each main menu item.
Analyze Data
Each option under this menu item is either a molecular or antibody product for
which you can import CSV files, or manually enter reactions and analyze data. For
details, see the individual product analysis sections in this user manual.
Menu Bar: Analyze Data
Reports
When you select this menu item, the Reports Page is displayed, allowing you to create reports of your
analysis data.
Data
When you select this menu item, a Data Window is displayed that allows you to manage, (i.e., delete,
archive, activate or move) sessions and samples, map session alleles to a new IMGT V3 nomenclature,
and view/print log files of session data.
Sample
Options under this menu item pertain to importing, creating, managing,
and exporting sample information. This is also the menu to use for
managing Luminex test lists and for creating sample work lists and plate
designs.
Menu Bar: Sample
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
30
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Patient Info
Options under this menu item pertain to importing patient/donor lists,
managing individual patient/donor information and tracking patient antibody
Menu Bar: Patient Info
data.
Profile
Menu Bar: Profile
There are options under this menu item for creating and managing your own user
profile, lists of system users and privileges and lab information. There is also an
option for switching between the home page options depending on your system and
navigation preference.
Utilities
The options under this menu
to importing catalog, code
files, configuring the
antibody products you
setting up your HLA Fusion
system validation.
item pertain
and serology
molecular and
analyze,
system, and
Menu Bar: Utilities
Help
This menu item allows you to access the following HLA Fusion
Software information:

Online help, which provides guidance in using HLA
Fusion Software.

Links to tutorial, “Show Me” videos.

Notification of updates and a description of new
features in the latest HLA Fusion software.
Menu Bar: Help
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
31
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

Dynamically updated Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ’s) about HLA Fusion software.

The build and version number of the HLA Fusion Software application you are currently using.
Note:
The online help can be accessed from anywhere within the HLA Fusion application when
you press the
key on your keyboard. Occasionally, updates are made to the online help
between releases of the HLA Fusion. To ensure you have the most current help file, check
the OLI download site
at:download.onelambda.com/pub/tray_info/Windows/HLA_Fusion_Catalogs/Documen
t/
Exit
Exit Confirmation Message
When you select this menu item, a dialog box displays that allows you
either to select Yes to exit and close the HLA Fusion application, or select
No to keep the current session open.
Toolbar Buttons
HLA Fusion provides a toolbar, displayed just below the main menu bar options with access to
commonly used functions.
Fusion Toolbar buttons

You can also hover your mouse over the buttons and a label will pop-up with the name of each
button.

Please note that some of these buttons are only available to use when you’re on an Analysis
Screen.
The following table describes each toolbar button:
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
32
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Button
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Name
Other Buttons and Controls
Home
Product Data Analysis
Find
Print
Sample Navigation Tools (Only visible during sample analysis).
The <<Summary link returns to the associated sample
summary table.
Print Preview
Print Screen
Displays the date of
the current sample in
the analysis window.
Magnify
Reports
Show
Navigator
Patient
Related
Records
Click the Find
button to open the HLA Fusion Search
Window to look for records using various criteria.
You can choose to search by Patient ID, Sample ID, Session ID,
Catalog ID, (and specificity), or Other.
Other allows you to provide multiple search criteria including: date
range, session status, and catalog type.
Side by Side
Comparison
The Find dialog box also allows you to modify the Navigator Session sort and display criteria.
The Side by Side Comparison and Related Records buttons are visible only during sample
analysis.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
33
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Fusion Search Screen
Set the order
that your
search results
will be displayed.
Select these
search criteria
for basic
searching.
Select Other to
enable the Sort
and Field displays.
Search by
Date range,
Session Status, or Catalog type.
Choose which
information
you want to be
shown.
After choosing your search criteria, click the
Find button to begin the search.
Note:
The date range set here, in the Session Date field, is used as the default date range
throughout HLA Fusion, such as in the Navigator and Reports windows. Each time you
change it, and click the Find button, the default changes for the rest of the application.
Print Report
From any Analysis Screen, you can click the Print
button to display a list of the reports that you can print,(the
reports listed are specific to the product you are currently
analyzing, so what you see in the example here may be
different). If you have set up a default printer, (configured
through Utilities > Printer Setup) the selected report is
automatically sent to the specified printer. Otherwise, a
dialog box is displayed from which you can select a printer.
Example of Print Report Options
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
34
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Preview Report
From any Analysis Screen, click the Preview Report
button to display a list of reports you can check out before
printing—reports listed are specific to the product you are
currently analyzing. The reports are displayed in a preview
window. Use the Print
and Export
buttons in the
preview window to output the report in the selected format.
Click the Close button at the upper right of the screen to
exit the preview window.
Example of Preview Report Options
Print Screen
From any Analysis Screen, click the Print Screen
button to open a new window containing a
screen shot of the current analysis window. Click the Print
screen shot directly to the printer.
To close this window, click the Exit
button or the Close
button, (top, left corner) to send the
button.
Example of Print Screen Results
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
35
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Magnify
From any Analysis Window, click the Magnify
button to activate the magnifying glass and
enlarge any section of the window. Use your mouse to move the magnifier and use the arrow keys on
your computer keyboard to increase or decrease the height and width of the magnified area.
Click anywhere on the screen to deactivate the magnifying glass.
Magnify an Area
Show Navigator
If the Fusion Navigator, (normally displayed on the right side of the application window) is not visible,
click the Show Navigator
button on the toolbar. Once the Navigator tab is displayed, move your
cursor over it to slide the Navigator panel open.
The Fusion
Navigator
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
36
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Patient/Donor Information
From any Analysis Screen, click the Patient
button to display the Patient/Donor
Information Screen where you can enter or edit information related to a patient or donor and
associate it with the current sample.
Patient/Donor Information Screen
You can also open the Patient/Donor Information screen at any time by
clicking Patient Info on the Fusion Menu Bar, followed by Manage
Patient.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
37
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Related Records
A Related Record is a sample that is associated in some way with the current sample or patient.
From any Analysis Screen, click the Related Records
button to load all records related to the
current sample into the drop-down list in the Sample ID field. Use the sample navigation arrows to
display the analysis of each related record, one-by-one.
To exit from the Related Records mode and return to the previous analysis screen, click the
<<Summary
link to the left of the Sample ID field at the top of the screen.
Note:
This function can be also accessed by right-clicking a sample in the Fusion Navigator.
Review the product-specific sections of this manual for more information about using this
feature.
Side-by-Side Analysis
From any Analysis Screen click the Side-by-Side Analysis
button on the Fusion toolbar to
compare the current sample analysis, (with a brown background) with previous analysis sessions for
the same Sample ID.
Begin Side-by-Side Analysis

Select a previous sample analysis from the displayed list to compare to the current one. The two
analysis windows are then displayed together for comparison.

Each window can be resized and moved by dragging and dropping. Click again on the Side-bySide Analysis
button to cancel the comparison display.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
38
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Current
Analysis
Previous
Analysis
Side-by-Side Analysis View
Note:
This function can also be accessed by right-clicking a sample in the Fusion Navigator.
Product Data Analysis
Product Group
Click any of the Product Data Analysis
buttons on the Fusion toolbar to display
that product’s home page, import a session file, manually enter a
session, or display and select from the Navigator List of
previously imported sessions for that product.

You can also click on any of the Fusion products located
in the Product Group at the top upper left side of the
Home screen to open a product’s home page.
Sample Navigation
The Sample Navigation tools, (only accessible from an Analysis Screen) give you access to all the
samples in the current session. You can select a different sample within the same session either by
selecting from the drop-down list in the Sample ID field, or by clicking the forward/back arrow
buttons next to the drop-down field.
The SampleID Drop-down
The Sample Navigator
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
39
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Clicking on the drop-downarrow displays all the samples within the current session, as shown
below:
Sample Drop-down

Selecting a sample from this list in the Sample ID field makes that sample the active sample in
the analysis window. Alternatively, you can use the forward or back arrow buttons to select
different samples.

Click this

Clicking <<Summary takes you back to the session summary for the current sample.
button to go to the first sample. Click this
button to go to the last sample
Sample Date
Sample Date
For the sample currently being analyzed, the Sample Date field
displays the date the sample was obtained.
The sample date can be set and auto-filled from the Session Import
table.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
40
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
LABType Analysis
The HLA Fusion™ LABType® analysis module analyzes Luminex CSV output files for LABType
products, including HD output files. Analysis results are based on catalog specifications, NMDP or
Local codes and serology equivalent reference files. All of which can be downloaded and used with the
Fusion software.
A few things should be completed or verified before you start an analysis session:

Make sure you have the latest catalog files, as well as NMDP code, local code,(if used) or
serology equivalent reference files before you analyze. You can download or update existing
catalogs from the LABType Home Page.

View and modify global product configuration settings prior to starting analysis. Global settings
are displayed and be can be modified on the LABType Home Page, or through the Utilities
menu. Global settings apply across all newly imported sessions.

Save time importing CSV files by verifying that the default URL’s and directory or folder paths
are pointing to the locations where these files are commonly stored on your system or network.
These settings can also be modified in the General Configurations section of the Fusion Explorer
Home page.

You can set HLA Fusion to remain on a sample that you’ve just saved or confirmed rather than
automatically moving to the next sample by changing this setting in the General Configurations
section of the Fusion Explorer Home page.
Note:
Some of the above tasks require Supervisor User privileges. You may have to verify with
your Supervisor that these tasks have been completed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
41
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Overview of the LABType
Analysis Process
After importing session(s), check the Summary Table for low Positive
Control and low Bead Counts. Consider deleting those samples.
Check the lower left graph of the Analysis Screen for
close reactions –just above or below the cut-off points.
Also check the Control and Bead Analysis Tabs.
Use the Force tab to help review homozygous
and rare allele results, (lower right quadrant).
Look at the reaction table to review allele
reactivity patterns, (upper left quadrant).
Check the Close Reaction Box to further
finalize assignments, (lower right quadrant).
Make any necessary cut-off adjustments,
(upper right or lower left quadrants).
Make final allele pair, serology and/or
coded assignments, (lower right quadrant).
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
42
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Start LABType Analysis
Importing LABType Session Data (Non HD)

Click the LABType button on the
Product Group Panel on the Home
Screen, the LABType
button on
the Fusion toolbar, or click Analyze
Data on the toolbar and select
LABType.
The LABType Home Page is now displayed:
Click the Gear button to modify
the LABType Global Settings.
Click to open the
Catalog Manager.
Click to download updated
Reference Files.
If the code being
used is NMDP,
the version is
listed here.
Click these links to
display Catalog,
Worksheet and
Probe/Primer
documents
Note: The Reference file Updates function does not work for NMDP or seroequivalent files.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
43
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To open the Session screen, click the “Include Imported” checkbox on the upper left hand side of the
LABType Home Page. The Session screen will then appear (below):
LABType toolbar
button
Date is highlighted
in yyyeeellllllooow
w
wif regional
settings do not match
between the CSV
file and Fusion.
Session ID
Catalog ID
Nomenclature/
IMGT version
Assign Patient
Double-click
Type to
a Patient ID to see
corresponding
the current
Patient ID
patient list.
To list
previously
imported
CSV files
Click to
browse
for CSV
files.
Luminex
CSV
Session
files
Sets the
Patient ID to
be the same as
the Sample ID
Note:
Double-click a Sample
ID to see the LABType
sample list (A sample ID
can be edited).
Select Autoanalysis to analyze
all session samples
when imported
Lists Positive
Control (PC)
values for each
sample
Allows
supplemental
analysis, (i.e., B
locus with Bw4)
Sample/
Patient
details
Open worksheets and probe/primer sheets to verify the accuracy of revision numbers,
(these documents do not contain a revision number in their filename).
2. Click the small Folder
Icon and select a
session(s) from the Select CSV Files screen.
Selecting/Importing CSV Files
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
44
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
HLA Fusion converts Luminex-generated CSV file data, such as date and time, to the local
regional code if a regional code is specified in the CSV file. (A regional code cannot be
specified for CSV files created with Luminex software version 2.2 or earlier.) If the first date
field is highlighted yellow, it indicates that Fusion detected a regional code mismatch. In
this case, it is recommended that you use the drop-down selector in the second date field
to choose the appropriate date, taking into consideration regional date format
differences.
3. Select a file from the list of CSV files to import, or click the Folder
icon above the list to
browse to LABType CSV file(s) on your system/network. If samples in a session have a positive
control value below the minimum setting, they are flagged so you can easily select and delete
them from the session.
Note:
You may see CSV files for products other than LABType, or other CSV files. This means
that you must first click on a sub-folder for LABType, or that your LABType session files
are not contained within the directory to which HLA Fusion is pointing.
4. HLA Fusion assigns a Session ID, (the CSV filename) automatically. Optionally, you can edit the
Session ID field. The ID can be alphanumeric, (contain letters and numbers) and will be listed
alphabetically with any other LABType session files in your database.
Session I.D. field
Note:
A Session ID must be unique to the Fusion database. If the Session ID already exists, HLA
Fusion prompts you to rename the session. It is also highly recommended that you do not
use any special characters in this field since they may serve a specific purpose as field
separators.
5. Click a CSV file to display its associated samples in the Sample/Patient Details table.
LABType Session - Patient/Sample Details table
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
45
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The Supplemental button can be used to add sessions that have already been analyzed, to
the current one for a combined analysis, (e.g., B7 sessions with B locus sessions). This
does not work for combinations of cross loci sessions, (such as A locus and B locus).
Note:
6. If a sample is already associated with a patient, the Patient ID and any existing or related patient
information is displayed.
To add patient information, do one of the following:

To add patient data which is already stored in the system, doubleclick in the Patient ID column of the Sample/Patient Details table, or

Click Patient Info on the Fusion Menu Bar and select Import
Patient List to import the patient information file.

To manually add patient data, type data directly into the patient-related fields in the table.
You can automatically assign the Sample ID to empty Patient ID fields
by selecting the check box for Set empty Patient ID to Sample.
7. Select a Catalog file. The catalog file selection method varies depending on the CSV file and the
catalog files you may have previously imported for LABType.
If you need to import more catalogs, click the [Download] link on the LABtype Home Page.
The Catalog drop-down list may not be immediately updated if you downloaded the
catalogs during the current import session. You may need to click the Home button and
then click the LABType button again to return to the import process.
Note:

If the CSV file specifies a template name, (only applies to CSV files from Luminex 2.2 and later)
and one of the available catalog files is associated with that template, then all new sessions
with the same template will auto-select that catalog.
Catalog Listing
As shown here, you can also select a different catalog file
from the one that Fusion has selected by using the dropdown list in the Catalog ID field and selecting any catalog
file listed.
If there is no template match, the system then considers
the closest bead match between the session and all
available catalog files. If only one catalog file is a close
match, it is automatically selected and you can check to
see if there are any samples that have been flagged as
having a low Positive Control, (PC) or low bead.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
46
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
8. If there is more than one match, a catalog validation dialog box is displayed with the best bead
matches. You can confirm the selected Catalog file by simply clicking the Close button. Or, you
can double-click a catalog file name on the list of Suggested Catalogs.
Catalog Validation
Clicking the Detail
button
on the Catalog Validation screen
opens the Mismatched Beads
window which lists which beads
were not found in the Session
and/or Catalog.
Click the OK
button to close.
Following Catalog File Validation, Fusion may ask you
if you would like to associate that template name with
the specified catalog file.
If you click Yes to associate the two, the system
automatically selects this catalog file for future imports
of any CSV files that reference this template.
Catalog Association
Note:
If the incorrect catalog and template are associated, review the section, Associating
Product Catalog Files and Luminex Templates, for instructions on removing the
association.
Check to see if there are any samples that have been flagged as having a low Positive Control (PC) or low
Bead Count; the rows of low PC or Low Bead Count samples are highlighted Gray.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
47
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
You may want to delete these samples because they often slow analysis. However, such removal means
you can no longer track these samples. Take the following steps if you want to delete any of these
samples:
9. Click in the border to the left of the Well position column to highlight the entire row for the
sample:
11
10
Oriental
Click a sample to select it – then press the Delete Button to the upper right to remove it.
10. To remove the sample and prevent it from being imported as part of the session, press the Delete
button (upper right side of the screen).
11. When session and sample information is verified, click Import.
If you selected the Auto Analysis check box, the session is imported as well as
analyzed when you click Import and it is displayed on the Fusion Navigator as an
analyzed session.
You can continue importing Luminex Session Files, or you can click a session in the Navigator to start a
Batch Analysis.
Note:
Once a CSV file has been imported, it no longer displays on the Luminex Session Import list
unless you select the Include Imported
check box. This may be used to reimport a session under a new name and/or user.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
48
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Acquiring LABType Session Data (HD)
To display a listing of HD session(s) on the CSV File Name list:
Selecting HD Session Files
HD Sessions
1. Click the Folder
icon. The Select
CSV Files screen opens. Note that you
may need to open HD sessions from a
location other than the default path for
LABType files. After clicking the Folder
icon, browse to the location where the
LABType HD files are stored on your
system/network.
2. Click the Open
Note:
button.
HLA Fusion converts Luminex-generated CSV file data, such as date and time, to the local
regional code if a regional code is specified in the CSV file. (A regional code cannot be
specified for CSV files created with Luminex software versions 2.2 or earlier.) If the first date
field is highlighted yellow, it indicates a regional code mismatch. In this case, it is
recommended that you use the drop-down selector in the second date field to choose the
appropriate date, taking into consideration regional date format differences.
3. Select an HD session from the CSV File Name list to display its
associated samples in the Current Sample/Patient Details table,
as shown below.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
49
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
HD Sam ples in the current Sample/Patient Details table
Caution: Luminex 2.2/2.3: Make sure you select the CSV file from the same directory that
contains all the run files and the run-index file, (generally a hidden file in the directory) that were
output from the Luminex machine into a session folder. Each sample in the session must
correlate to a run file in this directory. This is essential if the HD CSV file is not yet converted;
HLA Fusion automatically converts any unconverted HD files during import, if the
unconverted output file resides in the same location as the run files and run-index file for that
session.
xPONENT 3.1: The output file can be located anywhere. There is no run index file. But the
run files must be together in a directory that is structured with the session directory, and
underneath that, the run files.
A converted HD
Output file
Original HD Output file
(not converted)
There should be a Run
File for every sample in
an HD Session.
The RunFileIndex file
is usually hidden.
To see it, select
Show Hidden Files
in Windows >>
Folder Options
HD Session Listing (Luminex 2.2/2.3)
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
50
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Fusion assigns a Session ID by default. Optionally, you can change the Session ID. If the HD file has not
been converted, it will be named Output until it is imported, at which point it will have the name of the
original output session folder, (regardless of whether you rename the folder) followed by “_HD.”
Note:
A Session ID must be unique to the Fusion database. If the Session ID already exists, the
software prompts you to rename the session. It is also highly recommended that you do
not use any special characters in this field since they may serve a specific purpose as field
separators.
Note:
To see the RunFileIndex file if using Windows XP, open Windows Explorer and Click the
Folders button. Then, click View on the Windows Title bar and select Folder Options
from the drop-down menu. Now, click the View tab and scroll down to Hidden files and
folders. Select, Show hidden files and folders, and Exit. When viewing a selection of
CSV files, change the Files of type to All Files, to reveal the RunFileIndex file. In
Windows Vista and Windows 7, open Windows Explorer and select Tools >> Folder
Options. Next, click on the View tab and select Show hidden files, folders and drives. If
you rename a session, do not name it output as that is reserved for the original HD output
file.
Note:
The Supplemental button can be used to add other sessions to the current one, (e.g.,
supplementing B locus sessions with B7) for analysis. This does not work for combinations of
different test types, (such as A locus and B locus).
If a sample is already associated with a patient, the Patient ID and any existing, related patient
information, is displayed.
4. To add patient information, do one of the following:

To add existing data from the system, double-click in the Patient ID column of the
Sample/Patient Details table, or click the Patient List button on the toolbar. The
Import Patient window is displayed, allowing you to import the patient information file.

To manually add patient data, simply type data into the patient-related fields of the table.

You can assign the Sample ID to empty Patient ID fields by
selecting the check box for Set empty Patient ID to
Sample.
5. Select a catalog file. Your catalog selection method may be one of the following, depending on
the CSV file and the catalog files you have imported for LABType:
Note:
If there are no catalog files available for selection, or the one you want is not available,
review the Utilities section of this manual for instructions on how to add new catalog files
to the database.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
51
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

If the CSV file specifies a template name, (only applies to CSV files from Luminex 2.2 and later)
and one of the available catalog files is associated with that template, then that catalog file is
automatically selected. If you want to select a different catalog file, you can use the drop
down list in the Catalog ID field to select from any other catalog files listed there.

If there is no template match, the system then considers the closest bead match between the
session and all available catalog files. A catalog validation dialog box is displayed. You can
confirm the selected catalog file simply by clicking the Close
button. Or, double-click
another catalog name on the list of Suggested Catalogs.
The catalogs listed in the validation dialog box for HD sessions may also include non-HD
catalogs. You can identify an HD catalog by the ‘H’ in the name (e.g., RSSOH2B1_003_05).
A list of all
catalog files
having the
same or a
better level
of matches.
The letter “H” means the catalog is HD.
6. Following catalog file validation, the system may ask if you’d like to associate the template name
with the specified catalog file. If you associate the two, all new sessions with the same template
will automatically select this catalog.
Catalog Template Association
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
52
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
If the incorrect catalog and template are associated as in the above example, review the
section, Associating Product Catalog Files and Luminex Templates for instructions on
removing the association.
Check to see if there are any samples that have been flagged as having a low Positive Control (PC) or low
Bead Count; the rows of low PC or low bead count samples are highlighted Gray.
You may want to delete these samples because they often slow analysis. However, such removal means
you can no longer track these samples.
Take the following steps if you want to delete any of these samples:
7. Click in the Gray border area to the left of the Well position column to highlight the entire row
for the sample.
9
8
Highlight a Sample Row for Deletion
8. Press the Delete button (upper right of screen) to delete the sample and prevent it from being
imported as part of the session.
9. When session and sample information have been verified, click the Import
button.
The session is now displayed in Blue at the top of the Navigator tree. If you
selected the Auto Analysis check box, the session was imported and
analyzed when you clicked the Import button.
The session is now displayed in the Navigator as an Analyzed session.
You can continue importing more Luminex files, or you can click on a Session in the Navigator to start
Batch Analysis.
Note:
Once a CSV file has been imported, it no longer displays on the Luminex session import list
unless you select the Include Imported CSV check box.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
53
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Analyzing Exon 4+ Sessions
HLA Fusion allows you to analyze Exon 4+ data with generic HD or non-HD LABType samples to
provide higher resolution results. You can apply Exon 4+ resolution to locus A, B or C typing data.
Please follow these steps to analyze LABType samples with Exon 4+ resolution:
1. On the home screen, click either the LABType button or the product icon:
The LABType home page is displayed.
2. Click the [Download] link on the upper right side of the LABType home page and download the
catalogs you need to analyze generic A, B, and/or C locus and Exon 4+ LABType samples, (e.g.,
RSSO1E_001_00.cat).
3. Select files from the list of CSV files on the left side of the LABType Home Page that you want to
import for supplement with Exon 4+ data.

Or, click the Folder
icon and browse to the LABType CSV file(s) on your
system/network to locate and select CSV files.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
54
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The LABType Session/Patient Details Table is displayed.
4. Import the sessions containing samples you want to supplement with Exon 4+ data by
following the same process you have used to previously import CSV files into Fusion.
5. Use the Fusion LABType analysis window to analyze the samples you want to use in analysis
with Exon 4+.
6. Click the LABType button to return to the LABType home page.
7. Make sure you downloaded the Exon 4+ catalog(s) (e.g., RSSO1E_001_00.cat). If you have
not yet done so, click the [Download] link on the upper right side of the LABType home page
and download the necessary catalog(s).
8. After the Exon 4+ catalog(s) have been added to your computer or network, select Exon 4+
sessions from the list of CSV files on the left side of the LABType home page.

Or, click the Folder
icon above the list to browse to the LABType CSV file(s) on your
computer or network to locate and select Exon 4+ CSV files.
9. This will display the Exon 4+ samples in the Sessions Detail Table on the right side of the
LABType window.
10. Click the Supplemental button, (please note that the Import button is not available for Exon 4+
sessions). The Supplemental Analysis window is displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
55
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Supplemental Session Selection (Exon 4+)
The supplemental screen displays the grid of all the possible samples that can be combined with the
current session. The colors in the legend represent the following:

Mismatch or false reaction. For Exon 4+ a false sample is disabled: Pink

Sample is ambiguous: Orange

Found more than one sample for a locus: Light Blue

Nomenclature date different: Light Yellow

No related test available to combine: Light Gray
Make sure the samples you want associated for the supplemental analysis are selected.
Note:
Only one sample can be associated with each Exon 4+ per locus. If there is more than one
generic sample available for association with the Exon 4+ of a particular locus, the system
by default selects the most recently created sample. You can select an older sample if
desired.
Micro SSP data can be combined with Exon 4+ data only after it has been combined with
LABType data. LABType combined with Exon 4+ cannot be combined with Micro SSP data.
11. Click the Import
button.
The supplemental session and all associated samples are displayed in the Fusion Navigator where you
can select them to analyze in the LABType analysis window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
56
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
LABType Session Summary
The session summary page can be launched by clicking a session in the Navigation tree. It
presents a preview of the analysis results, listing each sample in the session and corresponding
batch analysis results.
To apply P or G
Click to assign the
analysis results as the
final results for all
samples.
Session Summary tabs
The
Summary
Graph
displays
data points
for each
sample.
grouping to
samples in the
session that have
not yet been
saved.
Search the
samples for XX
codes and replace
them with
updated NMDP
code.
The Field
Chooser:
Click to
include or
exclude
columns.
Free-form comments that you can enter here.
Fusion records recent actions, such as adju sting a cut-o ff.
LABType Session Summary Page
Batch
Print
Screen
The Session Summary Field Chooser
Click here to
open the
Field
Chooser.
Click the Field Chooser button on the far left side of the table
headings. The Field Chooser appears. This allows you to select or
clear the check boxes next to column headings to include or exclude
those columns from the Summary Table. Selecting or clearing check
boxes in this window instantly updates the table.
You can also rearrange the order of the fields by using your mouse
pointer to drag and drop any field name to a new location on the
Field Chooser.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
57
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
When you close the Field Chooser, a message displays to let you choose whether or not to save any
changes you’ve made. If you click Yes, your changes are saved for all future LABType Session Summaries
on this same computer until further modifications are made and saved.
Note: If you do not see a particular field available in the field chooser and you are sure it should be
there, go to C:\HLA Fusion\temp and delete the file named Labtype_Layout.xml.
The Batch Print Screen Function
The Batch Print Screen icon on the bottom right allows you to select multiple rows of sample data to
analyze. Each analysis is performed as a graphic representation just like the LABType main screen with
four quadrants. Each analysis is exported to a PDF file, one PDF file for each sample.
To use this feature, first use the mouse to select rows of sample data that are of interest by clicking down
and dragging within the leftmost column directly under the Field Chooser button. A blue highlight will
surround these chosen rows. Then click the Batch Print Screen icon near the lower rightmost corner
of the screen. A series of analysis windows will flash by, and you will then be asked if you would like to
examine the PDF files that were generated.
Batch Print Screen Row Selection
First, highlight
rows of sample
data that you
wish to see
analyzed and
reported.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
Second, click here
to trigger analysis
and PDF generation
for each chosen
sample.
After PDFs are
generated, a
message appears.
58
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Export, Preview and Print Buttons
Clicking the Export
button on the Fusion toolbar will format the Summary as a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet file. Fusion suggests a Session Name for the spreadsheet, but you can change it.
Clicking the Print Preview
button on the Fusion toolbar not only opens a new window which
shows you how a session will look when printed, but also allows you to select which pages and/or
specific parts of pages you would like to print.
When you click the Print
S e nd
Summary
to printer
button, the Summary is sent directly to the printer.
Snapshot
Page Width
View whole
Drop-down
Tool
Dynamic view
page
Z oom
Z oom
Zoom Out controlZoom In
M
a
r
g
i
n
tool
tool
Width
tool
view
Navigate
fro m page
to page
Print
Preview
Thumbn ail
View
The Print Preview Screen
Clicking the Print
ly to your printer.
button on the Print Preview Screen will send the images you’ve chosen direct-
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
59
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
LABType Session Summary Tabs
Summary Tab
The LABType Session Summary Tab displays a Results Summary Graph. The graph displays the
quality of batch analysis results for each sample:

Match M indicates multiple matched results (Orange)

Match S indicates a single matched result (Red)

False indicates a false reaction in results (Pink)

Miss indicates that there are no suggested results (Grey)
Results Summary Graph (Summary Tab)

Click any of the squares in the Results Summary graph to display the corresponding sample
analysis window.

If the Auto Accept All button is enabled at the bottom of the Session Summary screen, you can
click it to assign the possible results as final results for all samples - except those with
ambiguous results.
This feature is not activated unless you select it through the
Molecular Product Configuration>>Molecular
Analysis Configuration option in the Utilities menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
60
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Control Value Tab
This tab allows you to review the quality of the Control Values for each sample.
This tab is divided into three graphs, all of which have the following elements in
common:

The X-axis indicates the samples, sorted by well position.

The Y-axis indicates the raw data values specific to each graph, (e.g.,
positive or negative control values).

From any graph, right-click to select either Exclude Sample or Analyze Sample.

Double-click on any marker to go to the analysis screen for that
sample.

Hovering your cursor over any marker displays the sample’s
annotation.
The Positive Control Summary
The Positive Control Summary graph, (top) displays the positive control value for each sample.

The x-axis indicates the Sample ID names, sorted by well position.

The y-axis indicates the positive control raw data values.
The horizontal bar indicates the configured value for the minimum positive control. This value can be
configured through either the Utilities >Molecular Product Configuration menu, or by configuring
sample-specific settings from the analysis window.

Each exon is represented by a different color.

Double-click on any marker to bring up the analysis window for the sample.
Positive Control Summary Graph
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
61
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Negative Control Summary
The Negative Control Summary graph, (middle) displays the negative control values for each sample.

The X-axis indicates the Sample ID names, sorted by well position.

The Y-axis indicates the negative control raw data values.

Double-click on any marker to bring up the analysis window for that sample.
Negative Control Summary Graph
Bead Count Summary
The Bead Count Summary graph, (lower) displays the Lowest Bead Count per sample.

The X-axis indicates the sample ID names, sorted by well position.

The Y-axis indicates the negative control raw data values.
The horizontal bar indicates the configured value for the Minimum
Bead Count. This value can be globally configured through the
Utilities >Molecular Product Configuration menu.
You can configure Sample-Specific settings directly from the
Analysis Window. Double-click on any marker to bring up the
Analysis Window for that sample.
Bead Count Summary Graph
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
62
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The Bead Analysis Tab
This tab allows you to review the global session information for each bead. This tab displays three
graphs, which are described in the following sections.
One Lamda QC ID# 052, Probe ID # B101
Match M: (2) Match S: (12) Miss: (7) False: (56)
Bead Analysis Tab
False Reaction Summary
With the graph in the lower panel, you can review the number of False Reactions, (both positive and
negative) associated with each bead in the entire session.
False Reaction Summary
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
63
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The color of the bar represents the type of false reaction that exists:
 Green = false negative
 Red = false positive
The height of the color bar indicates the number of false reactions to the indicated bead.
Double-clicking on one of the bars in this graph changes the corresponding QC and Bead graphs to that
bead. Likewise, double-clicking one of the Bead ID’s along the X axis changes the corresponding QC and
Bead graphs to that bead.
The two graphs in the upper panel compare the bead profiles of the current session, (right graph) with a
histogram of the same beads run on a One Lambda QC panel, (left graph). If a local QC is used for the
session, the local QC histogram is displayed on the left.
QC Panel and Bead Profile Graph



Hover your cursor over the bars on the histograms to display bead information.
Right-click a bead profile to select either Exclude Sample or Analyze Sample.
Double-click any bead to go directly to the Analysis Screen for that sample.

Click the Bead Info
button to see the allele specificities for the current bead.
Bead Info Button – Allele Specificities

You can also resize these graphs by placing your cursor in the area between the graphs until
the cursor image changes to . Then you can click and drag the cursor to resize the graphs.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
64
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

To scale the histograms on the QC Panel Graph, enter a value in the Max Scale text box and
press the Enter key
on your keyboard. This resets the upper Y-axis value of the bead
profile histogram for both the QC and the current session.

Using the Bead Navigation

You can also select individual beads from the drop-down list.

Check the Exclude Bead
box to remove the current bead
from the analysis session. The excluded bead is listed in the
comment field with a notation that the bead has been excluded. In
addition, excluded beads are displayed on the graphs during analysis
as GRAY bars.

Adjustments made to probe cut-off values in Bead Analysis affect all
samples in this session. Pre-adjusting values to account for an
individual lab’s testing conditions can save time during analysis by
changing all samples at once, (i.e., globally).
buttons, you can navigate between the beads.
Bead drop-down list
Make global cut-off adjustments by doing the following:

Click and hold the horizontal adjust probe cutoff bar, and drag it up or down to a new cutoff
setting.
Using your
mouse
pointer, drag
and drop this
line up or
down to adjust
the probe cutoff setting.
Adjusting the Cut-off Bar.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
65
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To reset the cut-off, click the Reset Cutoff
list.
button and select a reset option from the drop-down
Reset Cut-off Menu

When adjusting the cut-off, you can determine which bead is displayed after the adjustment by
either selecting or deselecting the following check box at the bottom right of the Bead Analysis
window:

If the check box is selected, the next highest False Reaction bead is displayed after the cut-off
adjustment.

If the check box is not selected, the bead displayed before the cutoff adjustment was made
remains displayed.
There are two Comments fields at the bottom—a User one to record your own comments and a
System field in which HLA Fusion records recent actions you’ve taken in the Summary Window, such
as adjusting a cut-off. The system comments cannot be edited.
User and System Comments
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
66
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
General Session Summary Features
Aside from the functionality on the three LABType Session Summary tabs, there are other features that
allow you to manipulate the summary table data.
Sample Markers
Field
Chooser
Column
Headings
Samples
Session Summary Table

You can double-click a sample in the Summary Table or single-click a sample marker on the
Summary Graph to go directly to the Analysis Screen for that sample.

Double-click in the User Comments field to add or edit your remarks. System-generated
comments cannot be modified.

Click the Field Chooser button to the left of the table headings. The Field Chooser is
displayed. This allows you to select or clear the check boxes next to column headings and
include or exclude those columns from the Summary Table.

Selecting or clearing check boxes in this window instantly updates the table.
Note:
If you do not see a particular field available through the field chooser and you are sure it
should be there, go to C:\HLA Fusion\temp and delete the file named:
Labtype_Layout.xml.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
67
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Field Chooser
Repositioning a Field

Click on any column header of the
Summary Table to sort the table by that
column. The triangle in the column
header indicates the sorting order—up for
ascending and down  for descending.

Columns can also be dragged and dropped
to change their order.

When you close the Field Chooser, a pop-up message displays to let you
choose whether or not to save any changes you made. If you click Yes, your
changes are saved for all future LABType session summaries on this same
computer until further modifications are saved.

Click the Export button to save the Summary Table on your computer or the network,
(default location is C:\OLI FUSION\data\report). The file is saved in Excel (*.XLS) format.

Click the Print
button to immediately print out a report of the Summary Table.
An Exported Summary Table (Excel Spreadsheet format)

Click the Preview
saving.
button to review a report of the Summary Table before printing or
Print Preview Screen
Use slider
to move
from page
to page
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
68
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

In the Print Preview window, the left side displays symbols for each page of the report. Use the
Slider to move from page to page, or click on a page icon to go to that page.

Use your mouse Scroll Wheel, or click and move your mouse up and down to zoom in and out
of each page in the Print Preview window.
Excluding a Sample from Analysis
If you want to exclude a sample from an analysis session, select the Exclude
check box next to that sample.
You can also right-click the sample on
either of the graphs on the Control
Value tab and select Exclude
Sample.
This means the selected sample is not displayed in Fusion reports, or in Bead Analysis, Control Value
data, or as results in the sample Analysis Window.

The False Sample rows in the Summary table are highlighted in Pink; sample rows having
multiple matches are highlighted Orange.

If you want HLA Fusion to search the entire session for XX codes and replace them with the most
current NMDP codes you have imported, click the Replace XX Code
button. It is
recommended that you use this feature if the current NMDP file was recently imported.
Note:
For individual samples, the replace code function can be performed by selecting the
Reanalyze
button from the analysis window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
69
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Configure LABType Analysis for the Current Sample
Global default LABType configurations can be set from the Utilities menu. In addition, configurations
can also be set from within the LABType analysis window for the current sample.
Change Configuration for the Current Sample
Before starting analysis, you can change analysis options for the current sample by using the
configuration menu as shown below. Changes to configuration settings during analysis affect the
current sample only.
To change configuration settings for the current sample, click the Set Config button at the top of
Quadrant 1 of the analysis window.
Set Config button on the QC Graph in Quadrant One
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
70
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Assign Code
By default, Fusion assigns NMDP codes to the alleles. However,
you can optionally change these codes to one of the following
options:
Current Sample Configuration Options

No Code - the results, allele pairs assembled into a string
with no formatted code, are simply condensed without
applying a coded format.

Local Code - assigns user-defined code definitions, (codes
used by your Lab) for suggested code results.

P Grouping - Codes allele strings in P Grouping as
published by IMGT.

G Grouping - Codes allele strings in G Grouping as
published by IMGT.

Cross Code - allows allele combinations that cross serological groups (e.g., EAPW =
DRB1*04:03:01DRB1*04:03:03). By default, cross-coding is turned off so that allele pairs
are condensed only within the same allele groups.
Bw4/Bw6 in Serology
Bw4/Bw6 in Serology
Serology has identified many pairs of HLA-B
alleles which appear to differ only at the
Bw4/Bw6 region—the two mutually
exclusive serological epitopes. If you select
this option, Bw4/Bw6 is added to the
serology results.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
71
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Demographic Information
The Demographic Information option allows you to organize alleles according to their frequency. Based
on the demographic selection you make, HLA Fusion displays as many as three allele groups in the
allele pairs list:

Group 1: Frequent on both alleles

Group 2: Frequent on one or the other of the alleles only

Group 3: Frequent on neither allele
Demographic Frequency
Demographic Configuration Option
Note:
If the Demographic Information option is not available, (i.e., grayed-out) it means you
need to import an allele frequency input file. On the Fusion Menu bar, select
Utilities>Update Reference>Allele Frequency. Click the browse button and locate the
Allele Frequency files. Click Import Allele Frequency.
Minimum Positive Control
Set Minimum Positive Control
The default Minimum Positive Control value assigned by the system
is 1000. If desired, enter a new value in the Minimum Positive
Control Value field and press the Enter
key on your keyboard.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
72
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The sample is flagged in the System Comments as having a low Positive Control if any positive control
trimmed mean in the current sample falls under the threshold you’ve set. On the analysis Bead Tab, the
bead bars for samples below the threshold you’ve set are colored GRAY.
Minimum Bead Count
Set Minimum Bead Count
The default Minimum Bead Count value assigned by the system is 100. If desired, enter a new value in
the Minimum Bead Count Value field. The sample is flagged in comments as having a low bead count
if any bead count in the current sample falls below the threshold you set.
Set Sure Reaction Bead
1. Click the Set Config button, (upper right) and select the Set Sure Reaction Bead option in the
configuration menu to enter Bead IDs for which to force positive or negative values.
The Force Sure Reaction dialog box is displayed.
2. Here you can enter bead IDs for which you want to force positive,
(false positives are considered true positives) or negative, (false
negatives are considered true negatives).
Enter the bead ID’s you want to force POSITIVE
Enter the bead ID’s you want to force NEGATIVE
Set Sure Reaction
Force Sure Reaction
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
73
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
View QC
This pop-out list displays the Alternate QC panels, (that you created) which
are available for the current Catalog file which can be displayed as
histograms in Quadrant 1 of the Analysis Window. When clicked, you can
select from this list rather than use the OLI QC.
QC panels can also be created by right-clicking a saved LABType Session
on the Navigator tree and selecting Create Local QC.
Configure Alternate QC Panels
Low Positive Threshold Setting
The default Low Positive Threshold value assigned
by HLA Fusion is 200.
If desired, click the Set Config
button and
enter a new value in the Low Positive Threshold
field located at the bottom of the pop-out menu.
Samples below this value are graphed as GRAY,
vertical bars in the upper right Quadrant, (2) of the
Bead Analysis screen.
Set Low Positive Threshold
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
74
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the LABType Data Analysis Window
The LABType Data Analysis Window provides detailed analysis information for each sample in the
session. You can review the allele assignments suggested by the program and modify and accept the
typing assignments. HLA Fusion suggests possible typing results, but the final assignment must be
made by you or your supervisor.
From the LABType Analysis Window you can do the following:

Switch between code formats

Apply Bw4/Bw6 to serology results

Apply frequency filters

Show the delta between the signal generated and the cutoff point for each bead

Display reaction, recognition site, raw, and bead data

Navigate between beads

Exclude a bead from analysis

Adjust cutoffs

Assign non-coded allele pairs

Assign a coded allele pair

Assign serology equivalents

Make manual assignments

Remove assignments

Save and confirm your analysis results

Find the source of an ambiguity and ways to resolve it
The LABType Analysis Window is divided into four main sections, or Quadrants, each providing specific
data for analysis.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
75
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The LABType Sample Analysis Window
Quadrant 1
Quadrant 2
Quadrant 3
Quadrant 4
Displays the
Reaction Table
Displays
OLIQC
Displays User QC
for each p robe
Displays
Recognition
Site and Data for
each Probe
Displays LAB QC
(if created)
Displays Loci results for the
current p atient
for the selected sample
Enter new values he re
to modify the Y axis
of the QC histogram
Quadrant 1
Quadrant 1
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
76
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
RA = Resolve
Ambiguity
RA = Source of
Ambiguity
View Delta /
View Normal
BAR COLORS
Positive Reaction: RED
Negative Reaction: BLUE
Current Bead: GREEN
Click to sort by
MFI or BeadID
Click for
Sample Info
These bars
indicate the
Normalized
Value of
each bead in
a sample.
Represents
the Raw Data
Values for the
Positive and
Negative
control beads
of a LABType
assay.
Gray
diamonds are
the current
cut-off for
each bead.
Magenta =
Positive
Control
W
Whhiittee=
Negative
Control
Normalized
Value (Percent
Positive)
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
Beads in numeric order
Quadrant 3
77
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Allows one Displays results Groups pairs
with the same
force positive as types and
reaction pattern
subtypes
or negative
Displays the sero
equivalent of the
allele pairs
Quadrant 4
Displays
allele pairs
Pair tab
Assignments
suggested by
HLA Fusion
Enter your own
comments here
Moves
Unambiguous
possible allele
code to the
Assigned Code
List
Place a check mark
here to indicate that
Read-only notes
entered by Fusion
To re-analyze a sample
after new NMDP,
serology, or changed
number of false
Saves your current
reactions allowed
window layout
Assign the results
at the patient level
To assign and
save all results
To analyze
reactions from
two tests
Supervisor
Save analysis
clicks here to
for review and
confirm analysis
approval
results
Each quadrant of the Analysis Window represents a different view of the same sample. The quadrants
are all linked to one another: a change you make to Quadrant 2, (cutoff for example) affects the display
in Quadrants 1, 3 and 4. Each quadrant can be re-sized, vertically and horizontally:

Hover your cursor between the quadrants until the cursor image changes to
the graph to resize it.

Or, click the Quadrant Maximize
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
. Click and drag
button to modify the quadrant display.
78
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Keyboard Shortcuts for LABType Analysis Navigation
The following table defines some computer keyboard combinations you can use to quickly navigate
through a LABType sample during analysis.
To Do this...
Keyboard Combo
+ N
Navigate to the next bead, (from bead analysis & sample analysis screens)
+ P
Navigate to the previous bead, (from the bead analysis & sample analysis screens)
+ A
Assign and go to the next sample, (from the sample analysis screen)
Quadrant 1 (QC Histogram)
There are several tabs in this quadrant, as explained in the following sections.
QC Tab
The QC Tab displays a histogram of the reaction profile for the current bead against all samples of the
QC panel used in the analysis.
Each bar represents a QC sample, and its height represents the normalized reaction value.
Enter a new
Max Scale
value here
Hover your
mouse to
view
sample
details
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
79
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

Hover your cursor over any sample and the sample details are displayed, including typing
results, (see graphic).

To change the histogram scale, click inside the Max Scale box, type in new limits, and press the
Enter
key.
The Max Scale feature defines the maximum Y-axis range. When you enter a new Max Scale
value, the QC and bead data histograms automatically refresh to display the range from zero to
the new maximum value.

The cut-off line represents the One Lambda default cutoff value.
Rxn (Reaction)Tab
The Reaction Pattern tab displays the Positive reactions for each bead, (X-axis) versus every allele,
(Y-axis) defined in the catalog file.
From the LABType Analysis Window in Quadrant 1, click the Rxn tab to display the Reaction
Pattern Table.
Search by
allele
Click to sort beads
by sample reaction
Double-click to display the
selected bead in the Bead
Data graph (Quadrant 2)
Click to expand or
contract the table
Current
Sample
in BLUE
Positive
alleles
have a
shaded
background
An “X”
indicates
a positive
reaction
Click in this area to search by reaction
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
80
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The Default configuration:

Beads are sorted by sample reaction.

The current sample appears on top line of the table in a blue font

Positive alleles are listed below the sample row and have a shaded background.

Salmon coloring indicates a false positive.

Green indicates a false negative.
Positive reactions are displayed as an “X” on the table, (Blue for the current sample and Black for
the rest). PC, NC, and excluded beads are displayed as a zero, “0” on the table.
If you want to expand the table to its full size, click the Maximize button. To
minimize the view, click the button again.
OR…
Double-click anywhere in the area just above the
table, between the Rxn Reset and the Max buttons
to expand the table. To size the table back to its
original quadrant size, double-click in the same area
again.
Type an allele into the field and click the Find Allele
button to display the allele and its reaction pattern in
the first row below the sample. Double-click on an
allele name to bring that allele to the top of the table.
You can bring all of a certain allele group to the top
by entering an allele group (e.g., DRB1*03).
Click on the blank, gray row header to the left of an allele name or
reaction to move all the beads with that reaction to the left. Click the
Rxn Reset button to reset the table to its original configuration.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
81
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
When a column header is clicked, the table is
sorted by reaction criteria for that bead. The
first click sorts in ascending order from top
to bottom. The second click sorts in
descending order.
Double-click on the allele column to bring the selected allele up to the top of
the Reaction Pattern Table, just below the sample.
If you use the Analyze Combined
button to analyze two or more analyses for the same
sample, Bead IDs in additional analyses are differentiated from the current one in the Rxn Table by an
underscore and a sequential number.
For example, if the current sample contains a bead with Bead ID002, and you analyzed it in
combination with an additional analysis for the sample, that same bead for the second sample analysis
is listed as 002_0 in the Rxn Table. The number following the underscore increments for additional
samples you may add to the combined analysis (_1 for a third sample test, etc.).
Rec (Recognition) Site Tab
This graph maps the recognition sites of all probes in the sample and highlights those probes that pick
up any of two user-selected alleles for comparison.

X-axis: probe binding site in reference to the exons amplified in the test kit used, (starting with
exon 2’s on the left and going to exon 4’s or higher on the right, if applicable to the sample).

Y-axis: bead
From the LABType analysis window in Quadrant 1, click the Rec Site tab.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
82
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Probes that are
positive are RED.
Gap, or specialty
probes are shown
with a yellow
connector.
Negative probes
are colored BLUE.

Probes that are positive for the selected alleles are colored Red and are displayed at the top of the
plot. Negatives are colored Blue, and are displayed below the positives.

Probes are identified by a horizontal bar at the location of the recognition site. The probe position
is labeled next to the bar.

When you click a probe, the bead graph in Quadrant 2 updates and a pop-up information box
displays the following fields:
1. Bead ID
2. Recognition Site
3. Exon number

Gap, or specialty probes are indicated by a yellow connector that joins two recognition sites.
The recognition site data that displays when you click a specialty probe is for both of the
connected probes.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
83
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The Recognition Bar
Activate the Recognition Bar by clicking the Recg. Bar
button. Initially, the bar will appear
on the left side of the graph. Drag the bar to the right with your mouse pointer. Once you release the bar
the system will display the Recognition Site Summary, (Positive, Negative and Excluded probes) for
wherever this bar is positioned in the window.
Click to
activate the
Recognition
Bar
The
Recognition
Bar
A summary of
all probes that
lie in the area
before the new
bar position.
Probe Recognition Site Summary
Click the OK
button to dismiss the Recognition Site Summary.

You can enter up to two alleles, separated by space, in the Allele Text Field
and press the Enter
key on your keyboard.

Or, you can search alleles by double-clicking the allele pair on the Possible Allele Pairs
results list, (in Quadrant 4).
,
Recognition Site – Allele Pairs
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
84
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
All probes that are reactive to the selected allele(s) are colored:

Allele 1: Magenta

Allele 2: Cyan
Local QC Tab
The Local QC tab displays a histogram of the reaction profile for the current bead against all samples
this user has ever run for the same product, (same lot/revision) and over a specified date range.
One Lambda
cut-off line
Local QC Tab
Each Green bar represents a QC sample and its height represents the normalized reaction value. This
will serve as a user-created QC graph.


Hover your cursor over any sample, and the sample details are displayed.
The graph is continually updated as you analyze the product over time.

The cut-off line represents the One Lambda default cut-off value.
Patient/Sample Results Tab
The Patient/Sample Results tab details all of the results for all the
tests done on a Sample ID or Patient ID. As results are saved for each
locus, either the serology result or the allele code for each loci appears
in this all-loci section.
Click on any of the labeled Gray tabs along the top of the grid to sort
the results in either ascending or descending order. The direction of
the small triangles indicates how the results have been sorted.
Hover your mouse over any Possible Allele Code to see the entire allele code.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
85
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
You can use your mouse to widen the grid, or double-click between the
tabs to automatically increase the column width to accommodate all the
data presented.
Patient/Sample Results tab
Quadrant 2(Bead Data)
There are three tabs in this quadrant which are explained in the following sections.
Bead Tab
The Bead Tab
The first bead
displays the
histogram for the
currently selected
bead. Each bar
represents a sample.
The bar height
represents the
normalized reaction
value for the selected
bead in that sample.
Previous bead
Next bead
Last bead
Click to reset
values to default
The Red bar
represents the
currently selected
sample.
Cut-off bar
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
The Bead Tab
Current sample
86
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Double-click on a bar to navigate to the analysis of that selected sample.
You can click the arrow buttons to select a Bead Bar and display the selected bead in Quadrant 2.
Alternatively, you can also select the bead from the Bead Navigator at the top.

X-axis: Samples sorted in order of reactivity, (weakest to strongest).

Y-axis: Normalized value, (% positive).

Data points: Bars represent the normalized value of a sample for the current bead.

The Bar Colors: All bars are Green, except the current sample, which is Red.

A white bar indicates samples with a low, (PC) positive control.

Cut-off line: The cut-off line is located at the cut-off value for the current bead, (values
above this line are considered positive).

The cut-off line on this histogram can be modified. To adjust sample cut-off values, do this:
1. Click and hold the horizontal cut-off bar and drag it up or down to a new cut-off setting.
The cut-off value is displayed next to the cursor and changes as you drag the bar up or
down.
Adjusting the Cut-off Bar
2. To reset the cut off values to the default for the current sample, click the Reset
button and choose a default option.

When a Sample Bar is double-clicked, the analysis module displays the results for the selected
sample.

Hover your cursor over any sample and the bar turns yellow and sample details are displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
87
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Sample Detail

If you wish to exclude a bead from analysis, check the Exclude box. When checked, the current
bead is excluded from the analysis of the current sample. Analysis results are refreshed to reflect
the change and a notation is added to the System Comment field: Exclude Bead #[bead id].
Excluded Bead in System Comments

If HLA Fusion cannot determine any results that exactly match the reaction pattern entered, it
analyzes the reaction assuming that there is one false reaction in the sample. If a solution still
cannot be found, the system continues to search through additional false reactions until the
number of allowable false reactions has been reached, or a solution is found.
The false reaction setting must be between the minimum setting of 1 and the
maximum setting of 4.
Note:
Regardless of the maximum false reactions set here, the sample analysis stops at the first
false reaction found.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
88
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Raw Tab
Displays the data for the current sample as a table of values. From the LABType analysis window in
Quadrant 2, click the Raw tab to display the Raw Data Table.
Set close bead reaction threshold
(sample specific if done here)
Negative
Reaction
Positive
Reaction
No Reaction
(if bead is excluded)
Raw Tab
The columns in the Raw Data table display the following types of data:

Rxn: (1=negative, 8=positive, 0=no reaction)

Raw: raw data for the trimmed mean fluorescent

Normal: normalized value

PosCtl: positive control bead ID

OLI Cutoff: default OLI positive threshold cut-off

Sample Cutoff: sample positive threshold cut-off

Count: bead count
The beads having reactions that fall within the range of the close bead threshold are highlighted in
Yellow.

These close beads are also listed in the Close Bead text box in
Quadrant 4.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
89
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The Close Bead Threshold can be set for all newly imported LABType sessions by using the Utilities >
Molecular Product Configuration menu.
This sets the range of close beads based on the normalized values, +/- from the current cut-off for the
bead so that a bead can be considered a close bead and be highlighted yellow on the raw data table. The
default value is 3. To change the threshold value, type in a new value in the Threshold box and press
the Enter
key.
The raw table is updated instantly and rows with a close bead reaction are highlighted in yellow.

Click the Maximize
button to expand the Raw Data Table. Click the button again to
minimize the Raw Data Table.

Click on any column header to sort the Raw Data table by that column. Double click a Bead ID to
select that bead on the Bead Tab.

The count values and corresponding Bead IDs in Red are those beads that have a bead count
lower than the low positive control threshold. The minimum Bead Count threshold may be set
through the Utilities > Molecular Product Configuration menu, or by clicking [Edit] on
the LABType Configuration portion of the LABType home page. The default threshold is 100.
Bead counts lower than low positive control threshold
Bead Info Tab
When you click the Bead Info tab, it displays the
allele specificities of the most recently selected bead
from the QC histogram or bead profile graph, as well
as the recognition site of the probe.
Bead Info Tab
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
90
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Quadrant 3(Reaction Profile)
The Reaction Profile
Quadrant3 displays the reaction profile for the current sample against all beads in the analysis.
Change the value of the
normalized scale (Y axis)
Click to view the difference
between signal
strength and cut-off value
for each bead.
Click for
product
release
notes
Sort graph
display by MFI
or BeadID
Click for
sample
info
Maximize
button
Click to
magnify
or shrink
graph
Reaction
Data
Beads in numeric order

X-axis: Beads listed in numeric order from left to right

Y-axis: Normalized value (% positive)

Data points: Bars represent the normalized value for all beads in the current sample.

Bar colors: Positive reaction = Red; negative reaction = Blue; current bead = Green.

False Positive or False Negative: Light Blue

Excluded bead: Gray
When a bar is selected on this histogram, the bead profile histogram, (in Quadrant 2) and QC panel
histogram, (in Quadrant 1) refresh to display the selected bead.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
91
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
This histogram may be expanded when you click the Maximize
button at the top, left corner. The
histogram maximizes to the width of your screen, allowing for more space to view the bars in graph.
Click the button again to return the histogram to its original size within the quadrant.
The diamonds inside the histogram indicate the current cutoff position for each bead.
Bead-level cutoff adjustments can be made in this quadrant by dragging and dropping the arrows within
the bars. To adjust bead cutoff values, follow these instructions:

Click and hold the bead cutoff diamond and drag it up or down to a new cutoff setting. The cutoff
value is displayed next to the cursor and changes as you drag the bar up or down.
Adjust Bead Cut-off Settings
Click, drag and
drop these
diamonds
-up or downto adjust a
bead cut-off
setting.
When a cutoff adjustment has been made, the diamond changes into a Delta Arrow  that points in the
direction the cutoff was moved. The tip of the arrow points to the location of the new bead cutoff value
along the x-axis.
Bead Cut-off Delta Arrow
Cut-off
Change Flag
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
92
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
You can hover your mouse pointer over any bar and details for that bead are displayed for the sample.
You can add comments to the sample by typing in the
Comment field at the bottom. Double-clicking in this
text box opens a much larger window to type your
comments in.
Type your own comments in this area.
The Magenta and the white, (or non-colored bar on the right) represent the raw data values for the
positive and negative control beads of a LABType assay:
Magenta
Positive
Control
R aw
Data
Value
X-axis: Beads in numeric order.
Y-axis: Raw data value, (trimmed mean).
Data points: Bars represent the raw data value of a bead vs. the
sample reaction.
Negative
Control
Beads
Bar colors/display:

Positive control = Magenta

Negative control =
To expand the histogram, double-click in the area between Quadrants 1 and 3. To resize the histogram to
its original size, double-click between Quadrant 1 and 3 again. Or, click the Maximize/Minimize
button.
To view the Delta data, (the difference
between the signal generated and the
cutoff point for each bead) click the View Delta
button.
Quadrant 3: Delta View
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
93
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To go back to the normalized view, click the same button which now says View Normal
.
Would you prefer to make View Delta the default view so that it automatically displays each time you
bring up a sample in the LABType Analysis window?

Save the layout while this quadrant is in the View Delta mode by clicking
the Save Layout
button.
After you exit Fusion and log in again, your LABType sessions will display Quadrant 3 in View Delta
mode.
Quadrant 4(Test Results)
Quadrant 4 displays the typing results for the current sample. In general, the typing results include
possible results and user assignments for allele pairs, coded results, serological equivalency results, and
other assignments.
The left side shows various pair tab assignments suggested by the software. You must make all final
assignments by bringing a suggested pair into the final assignment area or by typing in an allele pair.
There are five tabs here:

The Pairs tab displays the possible allele pairs results that match the reaction pattern for the
sample.

The Force tab displays a list of alternate possible allele pair results for each bead if an
additional false reaction is allowed.

With the Type/Subtype tab, when an allele from one list is selected, the matching allele(s) are
highlighted on another list to show the possible match-ups.

The Match tab displays the coded format of the actual allele pairings for the sample.

The Sero (serology) tab displays all suggested serology equivalent data for the sample, based on
the possible allele pairs.
The right side shows possible allele code assignments for the sample, as well as close bead reactions.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
94
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Quadrant 4 – Test Results
The Pairs Tab
The Pairs Tab displays the possible allele pairs results that match the reaction pattern for the sample.
The pairs are suggested by HLA Fusion.

The list identifies the pairs and groups them by either full-match pairs, (no false reactions) or
the number of false reactions.

Results with false reactions are listed with the false reacting bead/well identified.

The results display one allele pair per row.

Possible homozygous NMDP-coded results are noted in the
System Comment field.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
95
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Allele pairs are grouped by demographic frequency groups:

G1 (it is frequent on both alleles)

G2 (it is frequent on one of two alleles)

G3 (it is not frequent on either allele)
Each allele pair group is identified by "(G#)" at the end of each allele pair to indicate demographic
frequency.
If the closest matching results include a false reaction, the false reaction bead is also listed.
No Solution is listed if there are no results that match the sample’s reactions within an allowable
number of false reactions. When this occurs, increase the number of false reactions and reanalyze.
Assign an Allele Pair from the Suggested List
Double-click on an allele pair under the Pairs tab to assign it to the final allele
pairs assignment area.
Alternatively, you can click to highlight an allele pair on the list under the Pairs tab and click the
down arrow V (assign) button next to the Assigned Allele Pairs title to add it to the final
assignment area. Multiple allele pairs can be assigned.
To remove an assignment, click and highlight the assignment on the Assigned Allele Pairs list and
click the X (remove) button.
Assigning and Removing Allele Pairs
Double-click
on a pair to
move them
to the final
assignment
area.
Select and
click the X
button to
remove an
assigned
pair.
…or click the
Assign
Button here.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
96
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Manually Assign an Allele Pair
Manual assignments must be entered in the Manual Entry Field, in standard allele nomenclature
format. Separate alleles with a space.
1. Enter an assignment into the text field below the
Assigned Allele Pairs area.
The
Manual
Assignment
area
2. Press the Enter
key to display the typed
allele on the Assigned Allele Pairs list above.
You can also make an assignment into the Manual Entry field by selecting a suggested allele pair and
clicking the Assign button (V) to move the pair into the Manual Entry field, followed by pressing the
Enter
key.
If you highlight more than one allele pair from the Pairs List, only the first one highlighted
is assigned to the manual entry field.
Note:
Force Tab
The Force tab displays a list of alternate possible allele pair results for each bead if an additional false
reaction is allowed. In other words, when there is a full match result, the system evaluates the sample
with a single false reaction.

This list is applicable for only one (1) forced false reaction.

All results are grouped by order of the beads and reactions—the default is to list beads in
ascending order, with false negative reactions listed first.

Use this tool for homozygous, or rare allele assignments.

False reactions are shown in light blue bars in the histogram in Quadrant 3 to make it easy to
locate and look at bead data.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
97
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Click a plus sign (+) to
display the suggested
allele pair assignments
associated with the bead
and reaction type.
Click to sort by
False Positive or
False Negative
Click a minus
sign (-) to
shrink it back.
Click here to
open all allele
pair results for
all the beads.
Click this button to copy
and save data to the
clipboard which can be
pasted into an Excel
spreadsheet.
Results are grouped by bead and reaction type, False Negative, (FN) or False Positive, (FP).
You can change the order by clicking Allele 1, Allele 2 or the FP/FN button until the results are
displayed in the order you prefer.

Click any Plus Sign (+) to display the suggested allele pair assignments associated with the
bead and reaction type.
Click the Expand All button to open all allele pair results for all the beads simultaneously.
Click the Collapse All button to close all results for all beads simultaneously.

Click Copy Data to send a copy of this data to the system clipboard so it can be pasted into
an Excel spreadsheet.
Type/Subtype Tab
Allele 1
matches
for the
selected
allele 2
result.
When an allele from the left side of the list is selected,
the matching allele(s) are highlighted on the right side
to show the possible match-ups in the results.
Type/Subtype Tab
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
98
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The side-by-side placement of the two lists is not intended to imply any allele pairing.
Match Tab
The Match Tab displays the coded format of the actual allele pairings for the sample. A Matched
Reaction Pair is a pair of alleles, (or group of alleles) with a reaction pattern that completely matches the
reaction pattern of the current sample.

This result differs from the Possible Allele Code results. The
Possible Allele Code condenses the results into a single code
where possible.

Hovering your cursor over a coded allele format displays its
code definition.
Match Tab
Sero Tab
The Sero, (serology) tab displays all suggested serology equivalent data for the sample, based on the
possible allele pairs.
Note:
Make sure you have imported the current serology equivalent file through the Utilities
menu. If you have selected the Computer Assigned Serology check box for LABType product
configuration, adjusting the sample cutoff values automatically results in serology
assignments.
Only one serology assignment can be made at a time per locus for the sample. Therefore, a current
serology assignment is replaced if you assign a different one.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
99
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Serology
Equivalent
Allele pairs
associated
with the Sero
Equivalent
Assign
Button
Serological
Assignment
Suggested Serology Equivalent Tab
1. In Quadrant 4, click on the Sero Tab to display the Serology Equivalents for the current sample
in the top pane of the tab, above its associated allele pairs.
2. Double-click an equivalent, or highlight it and click the V (assign) button to copy it to the
Assigned Sero field.
3. Click the X (remove) button to delete a serological assignment, or to select and assign a different
equivalency to replace it.
4. For Class II manual serology assignments there is a pop-up message that allows the user to
specifiy if the assignment is for DQA1 / DQB1 , DPA1/DPB1 or DRb1/DPB345.
Note:
To set auto-assigned serology results, select Computer Assigned Serology on the LABType
product configuration page. Users will be prompted to designate alpha and beta for DQ
and DP loci while making manual assignments.
Exclude Exon 3 Probes for a Locus
DQB1 checkbox appears
due to No Solution
If you are analyzing samples from a DPA/DPB or DQA/DQB kit
containing Exon 3 probes, some of the samples may result in false
reactions, or no solution. This is due to the limited sequence
information available for Exon 3 probes. For such samples you can
choose to analyze without the Exon 3 probes.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
100
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
As the example shows, if there is a false reaction or no solution for samples with these loci, a checkbox is
displayed to allow you to exclude the Exon 3. The checkbox only appears with false reactions.
If you exclude Exon 3 probes for a locus, it has the following results:

A comment is included in the System Comment field (Exclude <locus> Exon 3 probes).

All Exon 3 probes are displayed as Gray bars on the Reaction Profile, (Quadrant 3).

The <loci> check box is displayed with a check mark.
If the false or no solution is corrected by making cutoff adjustments without having to
exclude the Exon 3 probes, the check box disappears. All Exon 3 manual exclusions and/or
global adjustments will be kept as-is, whether the Exon 3 probes are included or excluded.
Note:
Allele Code Assignment
Allele code assignment is performed on the far right panel of Quadrant 4.

The Possible Allele Code field displays possible coded results for all pairs that fully match the
sample.

The type of code used is dependent on your selection when you configured Fusion for LABType
analysis, or for this sample – P & G Group, NMDP code, (default) local code, (user-defined) or
no code.

The possible coded result is listed at the top section of the field.

The code definition is listed below it.

If there are no codes for suggested alleles, then the suggestion is listed with XX, meaning the
code is undefined.

For multiple XX suggestions, each suggestion is distinguished from the others by numbering
such as XX1, XX2, and so forth.
Undefined
Allele Code
Undefined Allele Code

The allele codes displayed in the Possible Allele Code field are condensed by the system
based on suggestions from the list of possible allele pairs displayed under the Pairs tab. Note:
If allele code (possible and assigned) lengths are greater than 4680 then they may appear as a
blank line. We suggest that you use “+RP+” to see the complete results. This also applies to
MicroSSP.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
101
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

The allele code is based on the current NMDP code or local code installed in the system. By
default, the system assigns NMDP codes to the alleles. You can optionally change these codes
to either No Code, Local Code or Cross Code.

No Solution is listed if there are no results that match the
sample’s reactions within an allowable number of false
reactions. If the sample shows no solution, increase the
number of false reactions in the upper right quadrant for a
suggested result.
Allele Code Assignment

Double-click the possible allele code, or select the
suggested code and click the V (assign) button.

Click the X (remove) button to remove an allele code
assignment.
Manual Allele Code Assignment
1. Type an assignment into the text field just below Assigned Allele Code. Make sure you type the
assignment in correct allele code format:

The new nomenclature format: X*##:##(####) X*##:##(####), where X=locus type and #=
code number).

The previous nomenclature format: X*#### X*####, where X=locus type and #= code
number).
Otherwise, Fusion will not accept it and prompts you to make corrections.
Note:
If you click on the Translate button to display alleles in the new nomenclature format, you
cannot enter a manual allele code unless you reanalyze the sample and the alleles are
again displaying in the previous nomenclature format.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
102
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Press the Enter
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
key to move the allele code you typed in to the Assigned Allele Code field.
If you have a homozygous result, the assigned code can be edited in the Manual Allele
Code field to show the homozygous coded results once.
Note:
Unknown Allele Codes
Unknown allele codes are marked with XX followed by a sequential number. The numbers are reset to 1
for each sample and locus. When you see unknown codes, you should first make certain you have
imported the latest NMDP file. If you have the latest code file and are still seeing XX codes, you can
store these unknowns for later submission to the NMDP in a “.txt” file named
nmdp_code_report.txt,(by default stored in C:\OLI Fusion\data\NMDPExport)but the location can
be changed by modifying the path in Utilities>URLs & Paths). Code information is appended to this
text file as it is added; the newest additions are at the bottom.
1. From the Possible Allele Code field, click the XX code to
display the NMDP Code Report buttons, (to the right of the
System Comment field).
NMDP Code Report Buttons:
Click the Assign button (V)and choose one of the following:

To send the unknown code information directly to NMDP, click the +RPT
button. If
you’re connected to the Internet, Fusion will open the Bioinformatics.NMDP.Org webpage.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
103
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand

HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To add the unknown code information to a text file, (by
default stored in C:\OLI Fusion\data\NMDPExport)
right-click on the +Rpt button and select Save in text
file.


After the unknown code has been saved, Fusion displays a
confirmation message that the text file has been saved.
To add unknown code information to an Excel file, (by default stored in C:\OLI
Fusion\data\export\NMDPExport), right-click on the +Rpt button and select Save in
Excel File.
After the spreadsheet file has been saved, Fusion displays a
confirmation message.
When you’re done, click the Close button, (on the right of the +Rpt button) to remove the buttons from
the display.
Note:
The +Rpt button retains the last selection you made, (direct, text or Excel) so it can be
used as a shortcut. Unless you want to change your selection, the next time you report XX
code simply click +Rpt.
Other Assignment
The Other Assignment field may be used to make a sample assignment that is not restricted to any
format. In addition, you can highlight and add serology or allele pair or code assignments and add them
to the field for modification.
You can make other code assignments in one of two
ways:

Type an allele pair or allele code into the Other
Assignment field.

Click the V (assign) button and select one of
two options:
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
104
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. To assign just the possible allele code, select Assign Possible Allele Code to bring the
highlighted Possible Allele Code into the Other Assignment field.
2. Select Assign All to bring the Possible Allele Code, Assigned Serology or Assigned Allele
Pairs assignment(s) into the Other Assignment field.
You can also choose to modify any of the copied code, if desired.
Entered alleles are assigned and included in reports that are run which include this sample, but allele
assignments made this way are not listed in the final assignment field for this sample.
Reanalyze
If you have imported a new NMDP code, local code or serology equivalent file into the system, or you
change the number of false reactions allowed for a no-solution sample, you can click the Reanalyze
button to analyze the data using the new reference file(s) or to reflect false reaction changes.
Reanalyze Button
Note:
This reanalysis replaces only the NMDP, local or serological codes, or analyzes with
different false reactions settings. All other setting changes generally result in an
automatic reanalysis of the sample immediately following the setting change.
Analyze Combined LABType Sessions
HLA Fusion supports a combined analysis feature for both LABType and Micro SSP analysis sessions.
In a combined analysis, the reactions from two tests of the same sample are combined together in a
single analysis that may generate a higher resolution result. The previous test must have the same
sample ID.
Note:
To combine a generic or HD LABType sample with Exon 4-7, the combination must be done
from the Exon 4-7.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
105
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
From the Analysis Window, click on the Analyze Combined
button. The next pop-up
window displays a list of previous sessions that have used the current sample and share the same sample
ID.
1. Select the desired previous session(s) by selecting the associated Combine check box.
2. Click the Analyze
button at the bottom of the pop-up window.

The reaction pattern table includes bead information for all the sample tests. This table’s Bead
ID listings provide indication that the selected sessions have been combined and reanalyzed.

If you combine one sample in the previous nomenclature format with a sample in the newer
nomenclature format, the possible and assigned allele pairs and code are displayed in the new
format. If the sample with the previous nomenclature format contains an allele that is not
included in the new nomenclature, that older allele is dropped.
To rerun the combined analysis, click the Reanalyze Combine button.

If the nomenclature dates between the current one and the one(s) being combined with it,
conflict, then the session(s) you selected is highlighted red.

If you click the Analyze button and there is a conflict on nomenclature dates, a warning
message is displayed that gives you the option of continuing or canceling the combined
analysis. The nomenclature of the sample test you selected to combine with the current one
will be used if you continue.
Adding User Comments to Samples
Comments you or the system add to the Comments Field are displayed with the results in the
current analysis session, data look up and reporting functions in HLA Fusion. They are separated into
user and system comments. You can only add or edit the comments in the user comment field.
1. In the analysis window, enter your comments into the User Comment field below the Assignments
area, (maximum of 255 characters).
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
106
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To open the larger
comments area
Double-click
anywhere
in this area…
Comment Field
Comments are saved only after you click the Save
or Confirm
buttons.
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing
You can indicate the need for further testing of a sample by selecting
the More Test check box. The More Test indication is displayed in
results, data look-up and reports for the sample.
Assigning Serology and Allele Code Results to a Patient
Note:
This feature is available only to Lab Supervisors and for saved samples.
This check box is grayed-out until the sample has been saved or assigned and can only be selected by
those with Lab Supervisor privileges. If selected, serology and allele code results are then added to the
patient’s record.

In the analysis window, check the
Patient Assign check box,
located below the Assignments
area.

Click Confirm>> to preserve the
setting.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
107
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand

HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
If you previously assigned results to the patient, a message displays asking whether or not you
want to overwrite the previous assignment.
The Print Screen button prints the currently displayed analysis window.

From the analysis window, click the Print Screen button
current analysis screen.
on the Fusion Toolbar to print the
Preview or Print Reports
To view a LABType report for the current sample, use the Preview Report and/or Print Report buttons on
the toolbar.
In the Analysis Window, click the Preview Report button
or the Print Report button
display a list of reports you can preview or print for the current sample.
Or, hover your mouse pointer over the Print
see a list of available reports.
Note:
to
button to
If you select Molecular Custom, you will not be able to create a new custom report at
this point. The only custom reports available from the analysis window are ones you
may have previously created through the Reports window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
108
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Assign Coded Results
Use the Assign button to assign and save all unambiguous possible coded results, (those results for
which there is only one coded result). For the assignment of Serological or Allele pairs, or when you want
to choose in the case of ambiguous results, you must manually move them to Assigned and click the Save
button.
Translate (noncurrent nomenclature format only)
The Translate button
is displayed only if the sample allele format is in the older
nomenclature. Clicking the Translate button does the following:

Translates and displays all Assigned, (except from the Other Assignment field) and possible
allele code/pairs/haplo in the latest nomenclature format.

If a matching allele in the new format cannot be found, the allele remains displayed in the old
format.

You can view and print this display, but results cannot be saved or reported in this new
nomenclature format.

To go back to the older allele format, you can navigate to another sample and then return to
this sample.
Save Assignments
Note:
Make sure you’ve made the assignments before you save.
Lab technicians and supervisors can save analysis results for further review and approval. Saved samples
are available for confirmation by a Lab Supervisor only.

From the analysis window, click the Save
button located in the bottom right corner of
the analysis window to save analysis results for all the specificities currently listed in the Final
Assignments results box.

The Save>> button does not assign results; it simply saves the sample results and comments.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
109
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
If comments are added, the sample must be saved in order to also save the comments.

After saving, Fusion automatically moves to the next sample.

For confirmation, a Supervisor needs to access the sample for which you have saved the
assignments. You can return to the sample any time prior to confirmation.

If you need to make changes, click the Reanalyze
again.
button and then the Save button
Confirm Assignments
Lab Supervisors can confirm analysis results. When they do, samples are marked as Approved. The
Confirm button is colored Purple when you view a confirmed sample.

From the analysis window, click the Confirm
button located at the bottom right
corner of the window, to confirm all analysis results that have been saved in the Final
Assignments results box.

You automatically move to the next sample to continue confirming results.

When you first return to a confirmed sample, you will see that the Confirm
shaded Purple to let you know it has been confirmed previously.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
button is now
110
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Navigator Right-Click Menu Options for LABType
Session-Level Options
There are three menu options that are displayed if you right-click on an active session in the Navigator,
(select the session first with a left-click):
Session-Level Navigator Menu Options
Create Lab QC
Allows you to save the catalog file and the QC parameters from the selected session as a Lab QC panel.

The local QC is set up similarly to a catalog file where the user can, upon launching a new
analysis, select the local QC from the catalog list. The local QC information is then used in the
analysis session instead of the One Lambda QC.

When selected, a dialog box displays and prompts you to name the new lab QC (default name =
[current catalog ID]_LAB).
Create new QC Session Dialog Box
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
111
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
After accepting or entering the name, click the Create
button.

The system then saves the current session as a local QC using the selected name appended with a
date and time stamp (format: yyyymmddhhmmss).

For new sessions, this local QC is available for selection from the catalog file drop-down list when
you import LABType sessions.

This QC is also listed in the View QC drop-down via the LABType sample configuration menu
when you open a new analysis session.
Session Review
Local QC after being selected from View Lab QC
This right-click option provides various sub-menus, (filter criteria)
that allow you to review the samples in a session according to the type
of results obtained:

Review All (default) - all samples are listed and available for
analysis.

Single Pair - only samples with unambiguous results are
listed, (samples displayed with red square markers in the
Results Summary graph on the session Summary tab).

Multiple Pairs - only samples with ambiguous results are listed, (samples displayed with
orange square markers in the Results Summary graph on the session Summary tab).

Not Analyzed – when selected, the Navigator will display only those samples or sessions
which have been imported, but not yet analyzed. These sessions will appear in Blue.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
112
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Miss - only samples with no solution are listed, (samples displayed with gray square markers in the
Results Summary graph on the Session Summary tab).

False Reaction - only samples with false reactions are listed, (samples displayed with pink
square markers in the Results Summary graph on the Session Summary tab).
The samples in the session on which you right-clicked are filtered based on the sub-menu option you
select. The filtering criteria is then loaded into the batch navigation list. Fusion then takes you to the
analysis window where the samples are displayed in order of the batch navigation list.
Reanalyze with New Nomenclature
Allows the session to be reanalyzed using a new or updated catalog file.
1. Modify or rename the Old Session ID by giving it a New Session ID.
2. Click the drop-down arrow in the New Catalog ID field and select a new catalog file from the
list.
3. Click the Analysis button. The session on which you right-clicked is now reanalyzed using the
catalog file you selected.
Sample-Level Options
There are two menu options that are displayed if you right-click on
an active sample in the Navigator, (select the sample first with a
left-click) Related Records and Side-By-Side Analysis.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
113
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Related Records
A Related Record is a record that is associated with the current sample by Patient ID, or Sample ID.
Sample Drop-Down List for Related Records
Note:
This option is also available when you use the Related Records toolbar button
.
Select this menu option to load all records related to the current sample into the Sample drop-down list.

Use the sample navigation arrows to display the analysis of each related record one by one.

To go back to viewing the samples in the current session, click the <<Summary link at the top of
the window.
Side By Side Analysis
Use this option to compare the current sample analysis with one previously conducted.
Note:
This option is also
available by using the
Side By Side Analysis
toolbar
button.
Side-by-Side Analysis menu option
The current, on-screen sample analysis has a light Brown background.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
114
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Select a previous sample analysis from the displayed list to compare to the current one.
1. Click the OK button and the two analysis windows are then displayed in a comparison
window.
Current
Analysis
Previous
Analysis
Example of Side-by-Side Analysis Windows
Each window can be resized and moved by dragging and dropping.
1. Click the Side-By-Side Analysis
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
toolbar button to cancel the comparison display.
115
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Micro SSP Analysis
The Micro SSP™ HLA typing trays use the sequence-specific primer technology. These trays are
available in 96-well format and a few other formats such as E-Gel 96 (V), E-Gel 96 (H), and
Centipede. Analysis results are based on catalog specifications, NMDP code, and serology equivalent
references that you can import through the Fusion software.
The software suggests the allele pair assignments, but the final assignment has to be made by the
user. The results can be saved in the database for further review by lab technicians and for final
approval by the lab supervisors.
There are a few things that should be completed or verified before you start an analysis session:

Make sure you have the latest catalog files, as well as NMDP code, local code, (if used) or
serology equivalent reference files before you analyze. You can download or update catalogs
from the Micro SSP Home Page.

View and modify global product configuration settings before starting analysis. Global settings
are displayed and be can be modified on the Micro SSP Home. Global settings apply across all
newly- imported sessions.

The default setting of HLA Fusion is to automatically move to the next sample after a sample has
been saved or confirmed. If you prefer to remain on a sample, make the change in the General
Configurations section of the Fusion Explorer Home page.
Note:
Some of the above tasks require you to have supervisor user privileges. You may have to
verify with your supervisor that these tasks have been completed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
116
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Start Micro SSP Analysis
1. Click the Micro SSP
button on the home page panel, or the Micro SSP
icon on the Fusion toolbar, or select Analyze Data > Micro SSP.
Click to open the Catalog Management screen.
The Micro SSP Home page is displayed.
Click to open
the Update
Reference Files
screen.
Click to open
the Available
Reference
Updates screen.
(catalogs display
nomenclature dates
and revision notes)
Click to edit
the MicroSSP
global settings.
Click any link
to display the
selected catalog,
worksheet or
probe/primer
worksheets.
Note:
Open worksheets and probe/primer sheets to verify the accuracy of revision numbers,
(these documents do not contain a revision number in their filename).
1. Begin by clicking the Batch Entry button at the top, left side of the
screen.
Place a check marknext to Include Imported if you also want to
bring in batches which have previously been imported.
The Batch Entry window is displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
117
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Sample Name field
Select locus to filter catalog list
Browse for
Micro SSP
CSV files
Patient ID Field
Start a new batch
Save the current
batch information
Go to the
analysis screen
The system assigns a Batch Name automatically. Optionally, you can change the name.
Note:
A batch must be unique to the Fusion database for each product type. If it already
exists, the software prompts you to rename the batch. It is highly recommended that
you do not use any special characters in this field since they may serve a specific
purpose as field separators.
2. Use the browse button (...) at the bottom of the window to search for and import one or more
Micro SSP .csv files or follow the steps below.
3. Use the drop-down menu in the Locus Filter field to select a locus by which to filter the catalog
listing. This will limit the catalog list in the next field to only those catalogs that include the
selected locus.
4. Use the drop-down menu in the Catalog field to select a catalog file.
Note:
If you need to import more catalogs, click the Download link on the Micro SSP Home
Page for instructions on how to add new catalog files to the database.
The catalog drop-down list may not be immediately updated if you downloaded the
catalogs during this import session. You may need to click the Home button and then
click the Micro SSP button again to return to the import process.
5. Accept the session name in the Session field, or modify it.
6. Enter a name in the Sample Name field. If this is an existing sample name, other fields such as
the Patient ID and Ethnicity, are populated with existing data. You can also double-click in the
Sample Name field to display the Select Sample window from which you can select a sample.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
118
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
7. Click the drop-down arrow in the Sample Date field and select a date. The analysis window for
this session is displayed.
8. Enter an ID in the Patient ID field. If this is an existing patient/donor ID, other fields such as
the First and Last Name and Ethnicity, are populated with existing data. You can also double-click
in the Patient ID field to display the Select Patient window from which you can search for and
select a patient ID.
If they are not already filled-in, you can enter a name for the patient or donor in the First Name
and Last Name fields.
9. If it is not already filled-in, click the drop-down arrow in the Ethnicity field to choose the
patient/donor ethnicity.
10. If not already filled-in, click the drop-down arrow in the Patient/Donor field to choose either
patient, donor, or both.
11. If you want to associate a gel image with the sample, double-click in the Gel Image field and
browse to the location of the image you want to add to the sample.
Note:
Fusion supports the BMP, JPG, BMP and TIF image formats. However, certain versions
of the TIF format may not be supported by the Windows version used on your computer.
Select Gel Image Browser

Repeat the above steps until you complete the batch information, or until you want to save and
complete the batch later. Each Micro SSP batch session can consist of as many samples as you
wish to analyze with the same or with different catalog information.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
119
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Take one of the following actions once you are ready to stop creating the batch:

Click the Next>
button to open the Micro SSP analysis window.

Click the Save

Click New Batch to start creation of a new batch.

Click Close
button to save the current batch information and return to it later.
to exit the Batch Entry window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
120
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Configure Micro SSP Data Analysis
Global defaults for Micro SSP product configurations can be set from one of two places:

The Micro SSP Home Page

The Utilities menu on the main HLA Fusion home screen.
In addition, configurations can also be set from within the analysis window for the current Micro
SSP sample by clicking on the Config button to view a pop-up list of configuration options.
Micro SSP Sample-Level Configuration Menu
Assign Code
By default, the system assigns NMDP codes to the alleles. However, the user can optionally change
these codes to one of the following options:

No Code - The results, allele pairs assembled into a string with no formatted code, are
simply condensed without applying a coded format.

P Grouping -Codes Allele strings in P grouping as published by IMGT.

G Grouping - Codes Allele strings in G grouping as published by IMGT.

Local Code - assigns user-defined code definitions, (code used by your Lab) for
suggested code results.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
121
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

Cross Code - allows allele combinations that cross serological groups (e.g.,EAPW =
DRB1*04:01/33/35/38/72/76). By default, cross coding is turned off so that allele pairs are
condensed only within the same allele groups.

Bw4/Bw6 in Serology
Bw4/Bw6 in Serology
Serology has identified many pairs of HLA-B alleles which appear
to differ only at the Bw4/Bw6 region - the two mutually exclusive
serological epitopes.
If you select this option, Bw4/Bw6 is added to the serology
results.
Demographic Information
The Demographic Information option
allows you to organize alleles based on their
frequency.
Based on the demographic selection you make, HLA Fusion displays as many as three allele groups in
the allele pairs list:

Group 1: Frequent on both alleles

Group 2: Frequent on one or the other of the alleles only

Group 3: Frequent on neither allele
If the Demographic Information option is not active, it means you need to import an allele frequency
input file.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
122
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the Micro SSP Analysis window
The analysis window displays detailed analysis information for each sample in the session. You can
review the allele assignments suggested by the program, modify and accept the assignments.
HLA Fusion suggests possible typing results, but you must make the final assignment. Any adjustments
made in the analysis window are sample-specific and affect only the current sample.
From the Analysis Window you can do the following:

Use the test gel pane to change reactions and sample row positions.

Change the allowable number of false reactions.

Force one false reaction.

View and print sample analysis results.

Add comments and mark for more testing.
You can return to a session summary from the analysis window any time by clicking
the<<Summary link from the HLA Fusion toolbar next to the Sample ID.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
123
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
MicroSSP Analysis screen
The reaction
pattern table
Input and
Analysis Tables
Click here
to view
or add a
gel image.
Displays
Allele
pairs
Test Gel Pane
Groups and
Condenses
pairs with
the same
reaction
pattern.
Place a check mark here
to indicate the need for
additional tests.
The Results
area
A check mark here will
assign the analysis
results to the p atient.
The pane on the left side of the window displays each well
of the test in rows that are intended to duplicate the test
gel. Each well is shown with a reaction button.
When clicked or entered from the keyboard, you can
modify the reaction for the selected well between the
following settings:

8 = positive reaction

1 = negative reaction

0= no clear amplification, (wells with a 0 will
be excluded from analysis)
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
124
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
If you right-click in the black area of the test gel pane, you can select a different order
for the reactions when you click on a well: 0->1->8, or 8->1->0,etc.
Note:

After you analyze a tray, you can no longer add any
more sample information to that tray.

If the sample has not been analyzed, the right most
button on the bottom of this pane is labeled Analyze.
If analysis already exists for the sample, then the
button is labeled Re-Analyze.

This button is only enabled when a Sample ID has
been entered. If a Sample ID has not been entered when this button is clicked, the Sample
ID field is flagged with "!" as being empty, and no analysis is performed.

If other than the first well (1H) reaction is set to zero (0), a message displays, allowing you
to see system-suggested reaction information to help you decide if you want to analyze the
non-amp well with a positive or a negative score. If more than one well is set to zero, the
message does not display, but the suggested reaction information can still be viewed.
To see the possible reactions if the well was positive or negative, click Yes and scroll down the
Possible Allele Pairs list to the headings Neg Reaction, Pos Reaction. If neither type of
result can be suggested, the heading is No Solution and it will not be followed by results.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
125
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Possible Results for One Non-Amp Well
Headings to look
for when viewing
possible non-amp
well results.
View Well Details
You can view comprehensive details about the current sample by hovering your cursor over a well in
the test gel area of the analysis window.
View Well Details (with your mouse over a w ell)
Working with Gel Images

If you have a gel image already linked to the current sample, you can view it, or unlink
it.
OR

You can search for and link another gel
image to the current sample.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
126
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Here’s how you can link a gel image to the current sample:
1. Click the View Gel
button at the bottom,
left of the gel image screen. If no image is
currently linked to this sample, you’ll see this
message:
2. Click the Yes button and Fusion opens the
Select Gel Image screen.
1. Browse to a new gel image and click the Open
button.
2. Fusion opens the Gel Image window and
displays the gel image you’ve selected. The
window can be resized if needed.
If you want to link this image to this sample, click the Link Image
button.
Gel Image Viewer

To zoom in, click the  button.

To zoom out, click the
- button.
 To turn the image, click the Rotate
button.
Click to
close the
Gel Viewer
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Click to rotate
the gel image
To link the image to
the current sample.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
127
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To Unlink an image already associated with the current sample:
1. Click the View Gel
button.
2. When the image is displayed in the Gel Image viewer, click the Unlink
button.
Add Samples
There are two methods that samples can be added and analyzed in a session:
1. Click the Add New Sample
button.
2. Type a new Sample ID, or Sample Name, in the
Sample ID field, (above the gel image).
3. Select the Sample Date by clicking the Down
Arrowin the Date field to the right of the
Sample ID field.
4. And click the Analyze
button.
OR
Here’s an alternate method to add existing samples for analysis in Micro SSP:
1. Click the Sample Selection button to the right of the Sample ID field.
Select an existing sample from the list of Available Samples.
You can use the text box at the
top as a search tool.
2. Click the OK button at
the bottom of this window to move the sample from the
list of Available Samples to the Sample ID text box
above the gel image viewer. You may use the existing
Sample Name, or create a new one.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
128
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
3. Select/create a Sample Date.
4. Click the Analyze
button.
View Gel
Within the Serology Analysis window, you can view the gel for the current sample. This tool finds the gel
file, (JPEG format) associated with the CSV data file and displays it in the Analysis window.
1. Click on the View Gel button. A picture of the gel for the current sample is displayed as a new
window.
2. Click the Close button or click on X to close the gel.
Modify the Session Start Position
For multi-test trays, you can skip tray positions to match your gel photos by clicking the Add New
Sample button until the correct test start position is displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
129
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Rxn (Reaction) Tab
The reaction pattern table displays the positive reactions for each well, or bead, if combined with
LABType, (x-axis) versus every allele, (y-axis) defined in the current catalog.

The Reaction Pattern Table is displayed in the right pane of the Micro SSP analysis window.
Search by Allele
Double-click anywhere in this
area to expand the table
to half the analysis window.
The Max
button
expands the
reaction table.
Click to sort
the table
by the
selected
well
reactions.
Search by
reaction
pattern
Bead ID’s for LabType tests used in combined
analysis with the current MicroSSP sample.
Default configuration:

Wells, (Beads if it’s a combined analysis with LABType) are sorted by sample reaction.

The well ID depends on the row and location of the sample in the test gel pane.

The current sample appears in a Blue font, just below the cross loci row.

Positive alleles are listed below the sample row and are highlighted in yellow.

Cross loci wells are identified with the pound sign (#).

Salmon coloring indicates a false positive. Green indicates a false negative.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
130
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

Positive reactions are displayed as an “X” on the table, (blue for the current sample
and black for the rest). PC, NC and excluded beads are displayed as “0” on the table.

If you want to expand the table to full window size, click the
minimize it again, click the
button.

Double-click in the area just above the table, between the Find Allele and Max
buttons, to expand the table to half the analysis window. To size the table back to its
original size, double-click in the same area again.

Type an allele into the field and click the Find Allele button to display the allele and
its reaction pattern in the first row. Double click on an allele name to bring that allele
to the top of the table. You can bring all of a certain allele group to the top by
entering an allele group (i.e., DRB1*07).

Click on the blank row header to either the left of an allele name or the sample
reaction to move all the beads with that reaction to the left. Click the Rxn Reset
button, (above the Max button) to reset the table to its original configuration.

When a column header is clicked, the table is sorted by reaction criteria for that well
or bead, (if combined with LABType). The first click sorts in ascending order from top
to bottom. The second click sorts in descending order.

If you use the Analyze Combined button from the analysis window to analyze a
LABType test and a Micro SSP test, the Bead IDs from the LABType test are displayed
in the Well ID row on the Rxn table. These are recognizable by the bead ID followed
by an underscore and a 0.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
button. To
131
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Number of Allowable False Reactions
If HLA Fusion cannot determine any results that exactly match the reaction pattern entered, it
analyzes the reaction assuming that there is one false reaction in the sample.
If a solution still cannot be found, the system continues to search through additional false reactions
until the number of allowable false reactions has been reached, or a solution is found.
The false reaction setting allows you to set the number of allowable false reactions:
Minimum setting = 0
Maximum setting = 4

Note:
In the # False Rxn field, click the up or down arrow
to change the number of allowable false reactions.
Regardless of the maximum false reactions set here, sample analysis stops at the first
false reaction found.
Force One False Reaction
When a sample has a result with no false reactions, (exact match result) the Force 1 feature forces
HLA Fusion to re-analyze the reaction to allow for one possible false reaction in any well. This feature
is used to search for results for which one additional reaction can change the results.
1. From the analysis window, click the Force 1button to force the program to analyze the sample
with one false reaction.
Click the Reanalyze
button to reset the analysis to the original results.
Click the Rxn Reset button to return the Rxn Pattern table to the default settings.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
132
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Micro SSP Combined Analysis
The HLA Fusion software supports a combined analysis feature. In a combined analysis, the reactions
from two tests of the same sample are combined together in a single analysis. The previous test must
either have the same Sample ID or be associated with the same Patient ID.
To combine results for a sample, you need to start or continue a Micro SSP allele-specific test and
have a previously saved Micro SSP or LABType session to combine with it. After combining sessions,
the possible typing assignments are displayed, and the reaction pattern table changes to reflect the
reaction pattern of both tests.
1. From the analysis window, click on the Analyze Combined button below the reaction
pattern table. The Combined Analysis window displays a list of previous sessions that have
used the current sample and share the same Sample ID.
Select the desired previous session(s) by selecting the associated Combine check box on the far left.
Click the Analyze
Note:
button at the bottom of the pop-up window.
If you combine one sample in the previous nomenclature format with a sample in
the newer nomenclature format, the possible and assigned allele pairs and code will
be displayed in the new format. If the sample with the previous nomenclature
format contains an allele that is not included in the new nomenclature, that older
allele is dropped.
To rerun the combined analysis, click the Reanalyze Combined button.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
133
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

If the nomenclature dates between the current one and the one(s) being combined with it
conflict, then the session(s) you selected is highlighted Red.

If you click the Analyze
button and there is a conflict on nomenclature dates, a
warning message is displayed that gives you the option of continuing or canceling the
combined analysis. The nomenclature of the sample test you selected to combine with the
current one will be used if you continue.
Note:
Notice that the Analyze Combined button in the analysis window changes to Reanalyze
Combined button. This is an indication that the selected sessions have been combined.
If sessions are combined, a note is added to the system comments box.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
134
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Make Typing Assignments in Micro SSP Analysis
HLA Fusion provides computer-suggested allele pairs and coded assignments. Final typing assignments
can only be made by you, or your supervisor.
From the analysis window you can do the following:

Switch between code formats

Apply Bw4/Bw6 to serology results

Apply frequency filters

Assign non-coded allele pairs

Assign a coded allele pair

Assign serology equivalents

Make manual assignments

Remove assignments

Save and confirm assignments
Pairs Tab
The Pairs Tab displays the possible allele pairs results that match the reaction pattern for the
sample. The pairs are suggested by the software.

The list identifies the pairs and groups them by either full-match pairs, (no false reactions)
or the number of false reactions. Results with false reactions are listed with the false
reacting bead/well identified.

The results display one allele pair per row.

Possible homozygous pairs are flagged in the Comment field.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
135
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Assign an Allele Pair from the Suggested List
1. Double-click on an allele pair under the Possible Allele Pairs to assign it to the final pairs
assignment area.
Alternatively, you can click to highlight an allele pair on the list under the Pairs tab, and click
the V (assign) button next to the Assigned Allele Pairs title to add it to the final assignment
area.
To remove an assignment, select the assignment on the Assigned Allele Pairs list and click the X
(remove) button.
Double-click
a pair to
assign them
The Final
Assignment
area
The Manual
Entry Box
Select an allele pair,
(or pairs) and click
this button to send
them to the final
assignment area.
Click the “X”
button to
remove allele
pairs.
Match Tab
This data grid displays the coded format of the actual allele pairings for the sample. A Matched
Reaction Pair is a pair of alleles, (or group of alleles) with a reaction pattern that completely matches
the reaction pattern of the current sample.
Hover your
mouse
pointer over
an allele to
see its code
definition.

This result differs from the Possible Allele Code results. The Possible Allele Code
condenses the results into a single code, where possible.

Hovering your cursor over a coded allele format displays its code definition.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
136
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Manual Allele Pair Assignment
1. Make sure you type the assignment in the correct allele code format:

New nomenclature format: X*##:##(####) X*##:##(####), where X=locus type
and #= code number.

Previous nomenclature format: X*#### X*####, where X=locus type and #= code
number.
A manually
entered
assignment.
Type an assignment into the text box directly below the Assigned Allele Pairs list.
Press the Enter
Pairs text box.
key on your keyboard to move the typed allele upwards into the Assigned Allele
Possible Allele Codes
The Possible Allele Code field displays the possible coded results for all results that fully match the
sample. The type of code used is dependent on your configuration selection: NMDP code, (default) local
code, (user-defined) or no code.
Possible
allele code
Allele code
definition
Assigned
allele code
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
137
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

The possible coded result is listed at the top section of the field. The code definition is
listed below it.

If there are no codes for a particular suggestion, then the suggestion is listed with XX,
meaning the code is undefined. For multiple XX suggestions, each suggestion is numbered
as XX1, XX2, etc., to distinguish one from the other.

The allele codes displayed in the Possible Allele Code field are condensed by Fusion
based on suggestions from the list of possible allele pairs displayed under the Pairs tab.

The allele code is based on the current NMDP code, or local code installed in the system.
By default, the system assigns the NMDP codes to the alleles. You can optionally change
these codes to either No Code, Local Code or Cross Code.

No Solution is listed if there are no results that match the sample’s reactions within the
allowable number of false reactions.
Allele Code Assignment
1. Double-click the possible allele code, or select the suggested code and click the V (assign)
button.
Select an allele code and click the X (remove) button to remove an allele code assignment.
Manual Allele Code Assignment
1. Type an assignment into the text field just below Assigned Allele Code. Make sure you type
the assignment in correct allele code format:

New nomenclature format: X*##:##(####) X*##:##(####), where X=locus type and
#= code number.

Previous nomenclature format: X*#### X*####, where X=locus type and #= code
number.
Otherwise, the system does not accept it, and prompts you to make corrections.
Note:
If you click on the Translate button to display alleles in the new nomenclature format,
you cannot enter a manual allele code unless you reanalyze the sample and alleles are
again displaying in the previous nomenclature format.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
138
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Press the Enter key to move the allele code you typed in to the Assigned Allele Code field.
Note:
If you have a homozygous result, the assigned code can be edited in the Manual Allele
Code field to show the homozygous-coded results once.
Unknown Allele Codes
Unknown allele codes are marked with XX followed by a sequential number. The numbers are reset to
1 for each sample and locus. When you see unknown codes, you should first make certain you have
imported the latest NMDP file. If you have the latest code file, and are still seeing XX codes, you can
store these unknowns for later submission to the NMDP in a .txt file named
nmdp_code_report.txt. By default the text file is stored in C:\OLI
Fusion\data\NMDPExport, but the location can be changed by modifying the Interface path. Code
information is appended to the end of this text file as it is added; the newest additions are at the
bottom.
Select XX
code here…
1. From the Possible Allele Code field,
select the XX code to enable the NMDP
Code Report buttons at the
…to enable
bottom of the screen.
the NMDP
report
button here.
Click the
“X” button
to cancel.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
139
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Right-click the Report
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
button and choose one of the following:
To send the unknown code information to NMDP, select
Direct Request NMDP.

To add the unknown code information to a text file,
(by default stored in C:\OLI
Fusion\data\NMDPExport), select Save in text
file.

To add the unknown code information to an Excel file,
(by default stored in C:\OLI
Fusion\data\export\NMDPExport), select Save in
Excel File, or simply left-click the mouse button.
When you’re done, click the
Note:
button to remove the buttons from display.
The +Rpt button retains the last selection you made, (direct, text or Excel) so it can be
used as a shortcut; unless you want to change your selection, the next time you report
XX code simply click the +Rpt button.
The following shows examples of each result:
Direct to
NMDP
XX code saved
as a spreadsheet
(.csv) file.
XX code saved
as a text, (.txt)
file.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
140
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Other Assignment
The Other Assignment field can be used to make a sample assignment that is not restricted to any
format. In addition, you can highlight and add serology or allele pair or code assignments and add
them to the field for modification.
You can make other code assignments one of two ways:

Type an allele pair or allele code into the Other Assignment field.

Click the V (assign) button and select one of two options:
1. To assign just the possible allele code, select Assign Possible Allele Code.
2. Choose Assign All to bring the Possible Allele Code, Serology or Assigned Allele Pairs assignment(s) into the Other Assignment field.

You can then choose to modify any of the copied code if desired.

The entered allele is assigned and is included in reports that are run that include this sample.

It is not listed in any final assignment fields for this sample.
Possible Serology Field
The serology equivalent field displays all serology equivalent suggestions for the sample based on the
possible allele pairs. When you select a displayed serology equivalent, the allele pairs associated with
it are displayed in the field below.
Note:

Make sure you have imported the current serology equivalent file through the Utilities
menu. If a zero (0) appears in the serology assignments, this means you need to import
the current serology equivalent file.
Only one serology equivalent assignment for the sample can be made at a time. Therefore, a
current serology assignment is replaced if you select and assign a different one.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
141
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Note: If this is a multi-loci test, more than one locus can be assigned. However, for single locus tests,
only one locus can be assigned.
1. Double-click a serology suggestion, or highlight it
and click the V (assign) button to copy it to the
Assigned Serology field.
Serology
Equivalent
Related
Allele
pairs
Serological
assignments
2. Select the a serology equivalent and click the X
(remove) button to remove it. Or, select and assign a
different one to replace it.
Assign
button
Remove
button
3. For Class II manual serology assignments there is
a pop-up message that allows the user to specifiy if
the assignment is for DQA1 / DQB1 , DPA1/DPB1
or DRb1/DPB345.
Translate (noncurrent nomenclature format only)
The Translate button
is displayed if your alleles format is displayed with older
nomenclature. Clicking the button does the following:

Displays all assigned, (except from the Other Assignment field) and possible allele code/pairs
in the latest nomenclature format. If a matching allele in the new format cannot be found, the
allele remains displayed in the old format.

You can view and print this display, but results cannot be saved or reported in this new
nomenclature format.

To go back to the older allele format, you can navigate to another sample, and then return to
this sample.
Adding Comments to Samples
Comments you, or Fusion adds to the Comments field are displayed with the sample results in the
current analysis session, data look up and reporting functions in HLA Fusion.
1. In the analysis window, type sample comments into the User Comment field below the
Assignments area.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
142
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Or double-click in the User Comments field to open a larger writing space.
Comments are only saved after you click
the Save
button.
Your own
Comments
(255 characters
maximum)
Comments
entered by
HLA Fusion
Note:
The larger User Comments field expands to allow for a maximum of 255 characters.
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing
You can indicate the need for further testing of a sample by selecting the More Tests check box
followed by clicking the Save >> button. The More Tests indication is displayed in results, data look
up and reports for the sample.

In the analysis window, click the More Tests check box, located
below the Assignments area.
Printing the Current Analysis Window
The Print Screen button prints the currently displayed analysis window.

From the analysis window, click the Print Screen
current analysis screen.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
button on the toolbar to print the
143
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Preview or Print Reports
To view a Micro SSP report for the current sample, use the Preview Report and/or Print Report
button on the toolbar.
In the analysis window, click the Preview Report button
or the
Print Report button
to display a list of reports you can preview
or print for the current sample. The drop-down report menus are
identical for either Preview Report or Print Report.
Note:
If you select Molecular Custom, you will not be able to create a new custom report at
this point. The only custom reports available from the analysis window are ones you
previously created through the reports window.
Assign Coded Results
Use the Assign
button to assign and save all unambiguous possible coded results, (those
results for which there is only one coded result).
Save Assignments
Lab Technicians and Supervisors can save analysis results for further review and approval. Saved
samples are available for confirmation by a lab supervisor only.

From the analysis window, click the Save
button, located in the bottom right corner of
the analysis window to save the analysis results.

Fusion will automatically move to the next sample.

Samples must be saved in order to associate any user-created comments in the database or
reports. For confirmation, a supervisor needs to access the sample for which you saved the
assignments.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
144
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Confirm Assignments
Lab Supervisors can confirm analysis results. Samples are marked as Confirmed.

From the analysis window, click the Confirm
button, located in the bottom right
corner of the analysis window, to confirm all analysis results.
You automatically move to the next sample to continue confirming results.
When you first return to a confirmed sample, you see that the Confirm
shaded purple to let you know it has been previously confirmed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
button is now
145
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Micro SSP Session Summary
The summary table can be launched by clicking on a session in the Navigation Tree on the far right
of the screen. It lists each sample in the session and any saved analysis results.

Double-click a sample in the Summary Table to go directly to the analysis screen for this sample.
The Field
Chooser
button
Click on the Field Chooser button to
the left of the table headings to display
the Field Chooser.
In this window, you can select or clear
the check boxes next to column headings
to include or exclude those columns
from the Summary Table.
Selecting or clearing check boxes in this
window instantly updates the table.
Note:
If you do not see a particular field available through the field chooser, and you are sure
it should be there, go to C:\HLA Fusion\temp and delete the file named
SSP_Layout.xml.

Click on any column header of the Summary Table to sort the table by that column. The small
Up or Downarrow in the column header indicates the sorting order: up for Ascending
and down for Descending.
You can also click on a header and drag and drop it to change the
column order.

You can save any modifications you’ve made to the layout by
clicking the Yes button in the message box when it appears.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
146
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Your changes are saved for all future Micro SSP session summaries on this same computer until
further modifications are made and saved.

Click the Export button, (located at the bottom of the screen) to save the Summary Table on
your computer or network, (default location is C:\OLI FUSION\data\report). The file will
be saved in the Excel spreadsheet (.XLS) format.

Click the Print button to create a hard copy of the Summary Table.

Click the Preview button to view and/or resize the Summary Table before printing.
In the print preview window, the page view slider on the left displays icons for each page of the
report.

Click on a page icon to display that page in the preview window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
147
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Navigator Right-Click Menu Options for Micro SSP
Session-Level Options
There is a menu that displays if you right-click on an active session in the Navigator, (select the session
first with a left-click):
Reanalyze with New Nomenclature
Allows the session to be reanalyzed using a new or updated
catalog.
1. After right-clicking on a session, the Select New
Product screen opens.
2. Rename the session.
3. Click the drop-down arrow in the New Catalog
ID field and select a new catalog from the list.
4. Click the Analysis
button.
The session on which you right-clicked is now re-analyzed with the catalog you’ve selected.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
148
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Sample-Level Options
Two menu options are displayed if you right-click on an active
sample in the Navigator, (select the sample first with a leftclick).
Related Records
A related record is a record that is associated with the current sample by Patient ID or Sample ID.
Note:

This option is also available when you use the Related Records toolbar button
.
Right click a sample from the Navigator and select Related Records to load all records
related to the current sample into the Sample drop-down list, (at the top, center of the
screen).
Sample ID’s
Navigation buttons
Use the sample navigation buttons to display the analysis of each related record one-by-one.
To go back to viewing the samples in the current sessions, click the <<Summary link at the top
of the window.
Side By Side Analysis
Use this option to compare the current sample analysis with one previously conducted.
Note:
This option is also available when you use the Side By Side Analysis toolbar button
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
.
149
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

Right-click the sample, and select Side By Side Analysis.

Select a previous sample analysis from the displayed list to compare it to the current one. The
two analysis windows are then displayed in a comparison window.
Side-by-Side analysis display
Current
Analysis
Previous
Analysis

Each window can be resized and moved by dragging and dropping.

Click the Side-By-Side Analysis toolbar button again to cancel the comparison display.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
150
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
LABScreen Analysis
The LABScreen analysis feature of the program allows you to analyze Luminex CSV output files from
LABScreen products. Analysis results are based on the catalog specifications provided with the HLA
Fusion software.
A few things should be completed or verified before you start an analysis session:

Make sure you have the latest catalog files.

You can download or update catalogs from the LABScreen Home Page.

Some features, such as w632 normalization, may not be available if you have not already
imported the appropriate catalog(s).

View and modify global product configuration settings before starting analysis. Global settings
are displayed and be can be modified on the LABScreen Home Page, or through the Utilities
menu. Global settings apply across all newly imported sessions.

Save time importing CSV files by verifying that the default URLs and paths are pointing to the
locations where these files are commonly stored on your system or network. These settings
can also be modified in the General Configuration section of the default Fusion Home page.

If you prefer HLA Fusion to stay on a sample you have just saved or confirmed, rather than
automatically move to the next sample, this can be set in the General Configurations section of
the Fusion Explorer Home page.
Note:
Some of the above tasks require supervisor user privileges. You may have to verify with
your supervisor that these tasks have been completed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
151
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Starting LABScreen Analysis
Note:
If you want to set W632 Normalization as the default for LABScreen Single Analysis,
select the check box next to Use W632 Normalization as Default in the LABScreen Single
Analysis product configuration page.
Acquiring LABScreen Session Data
Select the LABScreen button from the Home Page panel
Current number
of downloaded
catalogs The most recent
available for catalog updates.
each product.
Click to modify
your LABScreen
global settings.
Select a tab…
or the Fusion toolbar
…to display
the current
configuration
settings.
.
Click to import
updated
reference files.
Information
on available
reference file
updates.
Current
warning
message
settings
Click links
to display
catalog,
worksheet &
probe/primer
documents.
The LABScreen Home page is displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
152
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Note: Open worksheets and probe/primer sheets to verify the accuracy of revision numbers, (these
documents do not contain a revision number in their filename).
Select a session from the CSV File Name List.
Place a checkmark here
to list previously
imported CSV files.
Click the folder icon to
search for Luminex CSV
session files in the
default location.
Session files are
listed here.
The LABScreen Session Import window displays.
The CSV file’s
location on
computer or
network.
Session I.D.
Luminex
Version
Catalog ID &
Nomenclature/
IMGT version.
Click any of
these headings
to sort in
ascending or
descending
order.
Date will be highlighted in yellow if
Select to automatically analyze
all session samples when CSV’s regional settings do not match between
the current CSV file and Fusion.
are imported.
Default
Negative
Serum, (NS)
values for
beads.
Click here
to sort by
patient
or donor.
Double-click any Patient ID to
see the current patient list.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
Assign Patient Type
to a Patient ID.
153
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
1. Click the small folder icon at the top of the LABScreen
CSV File Name list.
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Click folder
icon to browse
for CSV files.
2. Select a file from the list of previously imported CSV
files, or click the Folder Icon to browse to the
location of LABScreen CSV file(s) on your computer or
network.
Browse to Find LABScreen Session Files
3. Select a CSV session file(s) and click the Open
the Current Sample/Patient Details table.
button to display its associated samples in
Note:
You may see CSV files for products other than LABScreen, or other miscellaneous CSV
files. This means that you must first click on a sub folder for LABScreen, or that your
LABScreen session files are not contained within their own folder in the directory to
which HLA Fusion is pointing.
Note:
HLA Fusion converts Luminex-generated CSV file data, such as date and time, to the
local regional code if a regional code is specified in the CSV file. (A regional code
cannot be specified for CSV files created with Luminex software versions 2.2 or earlier.)
If the first date field is highlighted yellow, it indicates a regional code mismatch. In this
case, it is recommended that you use the drop-down selector in the second date field to
choose the appropriate date, taking into consideration regional date format differences.
If a sample is already associated with a patient, the patient ID and any existing, related patient information is displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
154
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To add patient information, do one of the following:

To add data from the system, double-click in the Patient ID column of the Sample/Patient
Details table or click the Patient List button on the toolbar. The Import Patient window is
displayed, allowing you to import the patient information file.

To manually add patient data, type data into the patient-related fields of the table.

You can assign the sample ID to empty patient ID fields by selecting the check box for Set
empty patient ID to Sample.
To assign secondary Ab to the samples, do one of the following:

To assign secondary Ab to individual samples, select from the Secondary Ab drop-down, or
type one in the associated field.

To assign a secondary Ab to all of the samples, select from the Apply to all drop-down or
type one in the field, and then select the Apply to all check box.
The system assigns a session ID automatically. Optionally, you can change the ID.
LABScreen Session ID field
Note:
A session ID must be unique to the Fusion database. If the session ID already exists, the
software prompts you to rename the session. It is also highly recommended that you do not
use any special characters in this field since they may serve a specific purpose as field
separators.
4. Select a catalog file. Your catalog selection method is one of the following, depending on the CSV
file and the catalog files you have imported for LABScreen.
Note:
If you need to import more catalogs, click the [Download] link on the LABScreen home
page to add new catalog files to your database. The catalog drop-down list may not be
immediately updated if you downloaded the catalogs during this import session. You may
need to click the Home button and then click the LABScreen button again to return to the
import process.
If the CSV file specifies a template name, (applies only to CSV files from Luminex 2.2 and later) and one
of the available catalogs is associated with that template, then that catalog is automatically selected.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
155
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
You can also select a different catalog from the one the system has selected by using the
drop-down list in the Catalog ID field and selecting any catalog listed.
If there is no template match, the system then considers the closest bead match between the session and
all available catalogs. If only one catalog is a close match, it is automatically selected and you can go to
5. When session and sample information has been verified, click the Details button. If there is more
than one match, a catalog validation dialog box is displayed with the best bead matches. You can
confirm the selected catalog by clicking the Close button. Or, you can double-click a catalog name
on the list of Suggested Catalogs.
LABScreen Catalog Validation
Displays a
list of all
catalog files
having the
same or
greater
number of
bead
matches.
6. Following catalog validation, the system may ask you if you would like to associate that template
name with the catalog.
This means that in the future, for any CSV files referencing
this template, the system automatically selects it; you can
select a different catalog for the CSV file, though, before you
import it.
Note:
If you want to see the selected negative serum, (NS) sample overlaid with the default
NS for the current sample, you must do so before you import the session.
If you pick a Class I Single Antigen CSV file and a catalog with W6-32 data
in it, the Apply W6-32 check box displays. If this check box is displayed,
you can choose whether or not to normalize the imported data for W6-32
by selecting the check box.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
156
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
You must import a LABScreen Single Antigen catalog type and a CSV file containing W6-32 data to apply
W6-32 normalization.
7. When session and sample information has been verified, click the Import
session is displayed in the Navigator tree on the right for subsequent analysis.
button. The
You can continue importing Luminex session files, or you can click a session on the Navigator to start
analysis. Either way, you can navigate between sessions and samples in various ways during analysis.
LABScreen Session Summary Screen
In the Navigator Tree, click on a Session Name. The Session Summary Table is displayed.
Click to
open the
Field
Chooser.
Click to d isplay the LABScreen Batch Report
Class I, II and MIC donor PRA
LABScreen Session Summary Screen

Double-click a sample in the Summary Table to go directly to the analysis screen for this
sample.

Scroll left and right to see all the columns of the Summary Table.

Click on the Field Chooser button to the left of the table headings. The Field Chooser
box displays. You can select or clear the check boxes next to column headings to include or
exclude those columns from the Summary Table. Selecting or clearing check boxes in this
window instantly updates the table.

Click the Auto Accept All
button to allow automatic assignment and acceptance,
(both Tail and Epitope) of results upon import.
Note:
If you do not see a particular field available through the field chooser, and you are sure
it should be there, go to C:\HLA Fusion\temp and delete the file named: X_X_X(antigen
type)_Layout.xml. For a list of the names used to represent the layout files for the
different screening antigen products, consult the section, Session Summary Layout File
Naming.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
157
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand

Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The session summary table columns and order can be modified
and your selections saved. When you exit the Field Chooser, a
pop-up message displays, asking whether you want to save any
changes you made in the field chooser. If you select Yes, only
the selected columns display on this same computer until
further modifications are made and saved.
Two columns of session data will always display, even if you save the field chooser
settings: Sample ID and Well Pos.

In addition to the Field Chooser, you can click on any column header in the Summary Table to
sort the table by that column. The arrows in the column header indicate the sorting order—up
for ascending and down for descending. You can also click on a column header and drag
and drop it to change the column order.

Click the Export
button to save the Summary Table as an Excel, (*xls) spreadsheet on
your computer, or on the network, (the default location is C:\OLI FUSION\data\report).

The Print
and Preview
other HLA Fusion programs.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
buttons displayed here provide functionality similar to
158
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the LABScreen Mixed Analysis Window
For each LABScreen Mixed sample in the current session, you can view the test data, adjust cutoffs,
assign screening results and more:

Review data and make overall assignments

Circle antigens in the specificity table

View molecular specificities

View Class I, Class II and MIC screening results

Adjust cutoffs

Review a raw data table for all beads in the sample

Overlay the negative serum sample on the current sample

Add comments, mark the sample for more testing and view a sample analysis report

Save and confirm results
The LABScreen Mixed Analysis Screen:
multiple antigens by listing each
Antigen search (Find one
separated by a space.)
Analysis tools
Specificities
Statistics
table
The tabs
displayed change
depending on
type of kit used.
User
comments
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
System
Comments
Confirm
Sa ve
Click to display
Raw data for assignment assignments
s
each bead
159
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Note: If you prefer to make Graph Raw the default view when you access the LABScreen analysis
window, go to the LABScreen product configuration settings and select the check box next to Display
Graph Raw by Default.

Both HLA Class I and Class II are displayed in a single window on the first tab of the screening
results. MIC results can be accessed from a subsequent tab. Analysis results are either positive,
negative, or undetermined.

The normalized value is displayed using the ratio formula for each bead in the sample.

Beads coated with Class I antigens are listed on the Class I histogram on the left side of the
Class I/II window, and beads coated with Class II antigens are shown on the Class II
histogram on the right side of the window. The X-axis labels show bead numbers, and the Yaxis labels list ranges of normalized bead values for each histogram.
Bar Colors:

Positive =

Negative =

Undetermined =
Find Antigen
Enter single or multiple antigens to circle the antigen(s) on the specificity, (center) area of the
analysis window.
1. From the analysis window, type antigens, separated by a space, into the field next to the Find
Ag
(Antigen) button. The antigen strings you type in must match the antigen
displayed on the window.
The Find Antigen Field
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
160
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Click the Find Ag
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
button to circle the entered antigens.
If the antigen entered is a broad antigen, then its split antigens will be circled. For
example, if A9 is entered, then A23 and A4 will be circled.
You may also click on any of the boxes in the CREG Bar, (as shown above) to circle the antigens in the
Specificity area without having to type the antigen in the Find Antigen field.
To highlight antigens
here…
…click any
CREG
box here.
View Molecular Typing for Antigens
1. From the analysis window, select the DNA check box below the
Sample Name at the top to display molecular typing for the
antigens in the sample. Note: Antigens will now be highlighted by
diagonal boxes in the Specificity area.
Molecular typing is displayed in Purple in the central, specificity area of the
screen.
Clear the DNA check box to return to the display of serological specificities.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
161
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
View MIC Antibody Screening Results
Select the tab labeled MIC to review MIC results for the sample.
1. From the analysis window, click the MIC tab to display MIC screening results.
MIC Antibody Analysis Screen
To return to Class I and Class II results, click the Class I & II tab at the bottom, left.
Adjust Cut-offs
You can change the positive or negative cut-off value for each sample by clicking and moving the cutoff lines on the histograms. However, you can change only one threshold cut-off at a time.

From the analysis window, click on the cutoff bar, and drag and drop it up or down the bead
graph to re-analyze the sample with a new cut-off value.
Positive cuto ff
lowered to 0.9
Negative
cutoff line
Positive cuto ff
lowered to 1.3
(Red)
Negative
cutoff line
(Green)
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
162
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Cutoff colors:

The Positive cutoff threshold is colored Red.

The Negative cutoff threshold is colored Green.
Reset All Options to Default
Any changes made can be returned to default values.

From the analysis window, click the Use Default
button in the upper right portion
of the window to return all changed settings to default values. The sample is re-analyzed with
the default values that were used when the sample was selected for analysis.
Graph Raw
The Raw Data graph shows the raw Mean Fluorescent Intensity, (MFI) value of each bead overlaid
with the imported NC Serum MFI.
1. From the analysis window, click the Graph Raw
button in the upper right portion of
the window to display a raw data graph with background values from the selected or default
NS for each bead.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
163
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
2. Click the Normal
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
button, (top right) to return to a normalized graph.
Raw Data Table
Analysis information is displayed in tabular form. Positive wells are in Red text. Rows highlighted in
yellow have reaction values over the threshold.
1. To display a sample’s data in tabular form, click the Raw Data
portion of the LABScreen analysis window.
button in the lower right
LABScreen Mixed Raw Data Table
2. Click on a column header, (i.e., Baseline) to sort the table by that criteria.
3. Click the Close button located at the upper right corner of the screen to close the Raw Data
Table window and return to analysis.
Raw Data Report
For easier navigation, exporting and printing, you can create a report containing raw data information for
the current sample.
1. Once the Raw Data Table is displayed, click the Report
button in the bottom right
portion of the Raw Data Table window to display a report of the raw data.
You may also use the Print Screen
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
button to export data.
164
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Statistics Table
This section of the LABScreen Mixed analysis window is in the lower left corner of the window, and
displays statistics for each type of screening results. The values shown vary according to the screening
results tab that is active.
LABScreen Mixed Statistics tables
Making Assignments
The Final Assignment radio buttons display the Fusion-suggested assignment. To accept the
assignment as displayed, save or confirm the sample.
To modify the suggested assignment, do the following:

From the analysis window, select an assignment for each class using the Final Assignment
options, (Positive, Negative or Undetermined).
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
165
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Saving Assignments
Lab technicians and supervisors can save analysis results for further review and approval. Saved
samples are available for confirmation only by a lab supervisor

From the analysis window, click the Save
button, located at the bottom right corner of
the analysis window to save analysis results for all the specificities currently listed in the
Final Assignments field.
After clicking the Save button, Fusion automatically moves you to the next sample.
For confirmation, a supervisor needs to access the sample for which you saved the assignments. You
can return to the sample any time prior to confirmation if you need to make changes.
Confirming Assignments
Lab supervisors can confirm analysis results. When they do so, samples are marked as Confirmed.
The Confirm button is Purple when you view a confirmed sample.

From the analysis window, click the Confirm
button, located in the bottom right
corner of the window, to confirm all analysis results that have been saved in the Final
Assignments Results box.
After confirmation, Fusion automatically moves to the next sample to continue confirming results.
When you first return to a confirmed sample, you’ll see that the Confirm
shaded purple to signify that it has been previously confirmed.
button is now
Adding Comments to Samples
Sample comments are displayed for the sample’s results in the current analysis session in all analysis,
data look up, and reporting functions in HLA Fusion.

In the analysis window, type sample comments into the Comments (System) field below
the Assignments area.

Or, double-click in either field to display a pop-up window that allows more text characters to
be entered.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
166
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Double-click in
either text field
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Type your own comments in this area
System comments automatically added here
to open the larger
comments window
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing
You can indicate the need for further testing of a sample by selecting the More Tests check box and
saving. The More Tests indication is displayed in results, data look up and reports for the sample.

In the analysis window, select the More Tests check box
below the Assignments area if more tests are needed.
Printing the Current Analysis Window
The Print Screen button on the Fusion toolbar sends the currently displayed analysis window to the
default printer.

From the analysis window, click the Print Screen button on the
toolbar to print the current analysis screen.

It is printed to the default printer you have selected for this
computer.
Previewing and Printing Reports
To view or print an Antibody Screening Mixed Data report for the current sample, use the Preview
Report button on the toolbar.

In the analysis window, click the Preview Report button
or Print Report
display a list of reports you can print or preview for the current sample.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
button to
167
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Reports available to preview or print
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
168
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the LABScreen PRA, Single Antigen & Singles Analysis
Window
There are several tasks you can perform from the LABScreen window for PRA, Single Antigen, and
Singles product analysis:

Review data and assign specificities

Circle antigens in the specificity table

View molecular specificities

Adjust cutoffs for the sample

Graph raw data

Exclude an antigen from analysis

Sort antigens for Single Antigen samples

Make tail or epitope analysis assignments

Manually enter an assignment

Assign a sample as negative

Add comments, mark for more testing and/or view a report for the current sample.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
169
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Sample
Info
Zoom
Control
Click to go
to Ab
tracking
X8
X6
X4
X2
Specificities
CREG
Bar
Statictics
Table
Lists
excluded
antigens
Select a
normalization
formula here
For a user
defined cutoff
Click to open
the donor
selection screen
Comment
fields
Check if more
tests are
required
For results
as raw
data
Save/
Confirm
assignments
If you prefer Graph Raw as the default view when viewing the LABScreen analysis window, access the
LABScreen product configuration settings and click the check box Display Graph Raw by Default.
CREG Table
The CREG Groups are displayed at the top of the table, with the specificities for the group displayed
below. Specificities are highlighted in one of the following colors.
If you want to hide the display of the CREG bar, click the CREG title at the top of the
window. A dialog box displays asking if you want to hide the CREG bar. Click Yes to hide
it. To re-display it, click again on the CREG title and click the Yes button to show it.
Note:

Purple = positive assignments from the Epitope Analysis Results box

Pink = Tail assignments that are masked by Epitope analysis

Blue = Cw assignments

Green = Bw4 and Bw6 assignments
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
170
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand

Click a CREG group, or
antigens to circle the
corresponding
specificities.

Right-click an antigen
to move the specificity
to the Final
Assignments box.
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Do the following if you want to use a different CREG table:

Click the LABScreen
home page button,
or select Utilities > Antibody Product Configuration
> Set Analysis Configuration.

From the Home page, click the Edit link to display the
Analysis Configuration Settings menu.

Select a table from the CREG drop-down list.

Click the Save button at the bottom of the menu.
Note:
For information on creating or editing a CREG list, review the section, Managing CREG
List Information.
Find Antigen
To enter multiple antigens, use a space to separate each entry. All entered antigens are circled in the
specificity field.
Clicking on the labels for Tail Analysis Results, Epitope Analysis Results, or Final Assignment fields
circles all specificities listed in the selected results field.
Clicking the Excluded Antigen field label circles the excluded antigens.
If you use the Find Antigen feature while the window is displaying molecular specificities, you are not
able to see the circled antigens until you deselect the DNA check box.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
171
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. From the analysis window, type antigens or CREG groups
(e.g., 1C or 2C) into the field next to the Find Ag (Antigen)
button.
4. Click the Find Ag
button and Fusion will circle the entered antigens or CREG groups.
Click the Find Ag button again to remove the circles from antigens in the specificity field.
Change the Lab Scale
The maximum value for the bead graph scale, per the baseline, user or raw data formula can be
modified from the analysis window. To do so, follow these steps:

Right-click in the background area of the analysis window, just above the top value of the y-axis of
the bead graph.
Right-click in the light blue area to change the Lab Scale.

Select Set Max Scale.

Type a new value in the Scale field and press the Enter
key on your keyboard.
To return to the LAB Scale value, follow the above steps, but select the LAB Scale option.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
172
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
View Molecular Specificities
Molecular specificities are displayed in the specificity field of the analysis window, and can be used to
make allele assignments. Screening results are displayed and saved as serological specificities.
1. From the analysis window, select the DNA
check box near the top of the Analysis
Screen to display molecular specificities.
Clear the check box to return to the serological specificities.
Molecular specificities are displayed when the DNA Check box is selected.
Adjust Cut-offs
You can change a threshold cut-off value for each sample. You can only change one threshold cut-off
at a time.
1. In the analysis window, click on the threshold bar you want to adjust.
2. Drag and drop the cut-off bar to adjust the cut-off and re-analyze the sample.
Adjusting Threshold Cut-offs
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
173
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Select Minimum Positive Threshold
You can change the minimum positive threshold by using the pull-down menu above
the bead graph.

From the analysis window, select a new positive threshold from the
Threshold drop-down list, (next to the analysis tools near the top of the
window). The sample is re-analyzed according to the new threshold. The effects
of the threshold change are displayed in the result boxes.
Change Normalization Formula
By default, LABScreen analysis uses the Baseline normalization formula. You can change the
normalization formula used in analysis to any of the following: Ratio Scoring, Mixed and Raw Data.
When using the Raw Data normalization formula, the sample negative control is shown as a black line on
the Bead reactivity graph. Changes apply only to the current sample.

From the analysis window, select a new normalization formula from the Formula drop-down
list. The sample is re-analyzed.
Normalization Formula Selection
Exclude Antigen(s) from Analysis
All antigens entered are excluded from analysis. To enter multiple antigens, use a comma to separate
antigen entries.
1. From the analysis window, click the Excl. Ag.
displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
button. The Exclude Antigen pop-up box is
174
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
2. Type the antigens to be excluded and click the OK button. Note: the
use of wildcard characters, i.e. * is not allowed here.
If you change your mind and click the Clear
be deleted and you’ll see this message:
button, your entries will
The sample is re-analyzed, and the excluded antigens are listed in the Excluded Antigens field under the
analysis statistics box.
To include all these antigens again, click the Excl. Ag
button
again, click the Clear button to remove antigens from the field, and
then click OK to re-analyze with these antigens included.
Note:
To also exclude all typing antigens for the associated patient, select the Exclude
Patient Typing check box.
Include/Exclude Cw
You can include or exclude Cw antigen specificities from analysis.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
175
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. Near the top of the analysis window, select the Cw check box to re-analyze with Cw specificities.
Clear the Cw check box to re-analyze without Cw specificities.
Raw Data
Graph
Normalized
Graph
Reset All Options to Default
Any changes you make can be returned to the default values.

From the analysis window, click the Use Default
button in the upper right corner of
the window to return all changed settings to the default values for this sample.

The sample is re-analyzed with the default values.
Force Positive
If a sample has a low bead count, the Force +ve
button is displayed, allowing you to force a
positive result by recalculating for allowance of low bead counts.

For low negative control samples, click the Force +ve
as positive.
button to analyze the sample
The sample is re-analyzed.
Graph Raw
The Raw Data Graph shows the raw Mean Fluorescent Intensity, (MFI) value of each bead overlaid
with the imported NC Serum MFI.
1. In the analysis window, click the Graph Raw
button to display raw data graph with
background values.
Click the Normal
button to return to normalized graph.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
176
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Raw Data Table
Positive beads are displayed in red text. Rows highlighted in yellow have normalized values that are
above the value in the Min Value box. Changes made to the normalization formula and minimum
normalized value apply only to the raw data table and not to analysis.
1. From the analysis window, click the Raw Data
button on the bottom right of the
analysis window to display Raw Data Table.
LABScreen PRA/SA Raw data table
Click on a header to sort the table by that category.
Note:
You can select a different formula from the Formula drop-down list, (either baseline,
ratio scoring, or raw data), but if you do this, you must also adjust the Min Value
(lowest value of a positive for the current sample based on the selected reaction
threshold) so it correlates with the new formula.
2. Click on the
button located at the upper right corner of the table, or the Close
exit and to return to analysis.
button to
Raw Data Report
For easier navigation, exporting and printing, you can create a report containing the raw data
information for the current sample.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
177
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. Once the Raw Data Table is displayed, click the Report
button on the bottom right
portion of the Raw Data Table window to display a report of the raw data.
Displaying DSA (Donor Specific Antigen)Match/Mismatch
By clicking the M button, you can display all the DSA match/mismatch information for the patient
associated with this sample and the donor(s) associated with the patient.
Note:
If you do not have a patient associated with this sample, you will receive a warning
message, and will not be able to display any DSA match/mismatch information until you
associate a patient to the sample and at least one donor to the patient.
To display the information, take the following steps:
1. Click the M button, (next to the T button on the right). If you have a patient associated with this
sample, the DSA Match/Mismatch window opens.
If necessary, select another donor from the Donor
ID drop-down list.
Use the  or - buttons to expand, or collapse the
table.
The colors on the table mean the following:
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)

Green: represents a matched antigen.

Orange: represents a mismatched
antigen that has been confirmed in the
final assignment.

Yellow: represents a mismatched
antigen that has not yet been
confirmed in the final assignment.
178
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Adding Comments to Samples
Comments you or the system add to the Comments field are displayed with the results in the current
analysis session, data look up and reporting functions in HLA Fusion.
1. In the Analysis Window, type sample comments into the Comment field below the
Assignments area.
Comments are saved when you click Save.
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing
You can indicate the need for further testing of a sample by selecting the More Testscheck box
and saving.
The More Tests indication is displayed in results, data look up and reports for the sample.

In the analysis window, check the More Tests
Assignments area.
check box, located below the

The Test Selection window is displayed.

Select the check boxes next to the additional tests you want run.

Enter a name for the test list you are creating.

Click Save to save the test list and return to the analysis window.
Printing the Current Analysis Window
The Print Screen button prints the currently displayed analysis window.

From the analysis window, click the Print Screen
analysis screen.
button on the toolbar to print the current
Previewing and Printing Reports
To view or print a report for the current sample, use the Preview Report button on the toolbar.

In the analysis window, click the Preview Report button
or Print Report button
display a list of reports you can print or preview for the current sample.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
to
179
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Reports available for preview/printing
Note:
If you select Antibody Custom, you are not be able to create a new custom report at
this point. The only custom reports available from the analysis window are ones you
previously created through the Reports window.
Making Final Assignments
Final assignments can be made from either the Tail, (not applicable to LABScreen Singles samples) or
Epitope results fields.
Note:
If you want the Mean, (Normal) of positives to be used for Epitope analysis, instead of
the Mean, (Raw) of positives, check the setting Use the Mean of Normal on the
LABScreen PRA, Single Antigen and Singles product configuration screens.
From the analysis window, do one of the following to make assignments:
 Double-click an antigen specificity in the Tail or Epitope Analysis results box to assign the
specified antigen to the Final Assignment list.
 Click to highlight the specificity and click the Assign Single
button to move it to the
Final Assignment list.
Click the Assign All
button to the right of the Tail or Epitope list to move all the current
results on that list to the Final Assignments area.
 Right-click on a specificity, or CREG group on the CREG Table to assign it to the Final
Assignments area.
Manual Assignments
Manual assignments can be entered in the field below the Final Assignments results box. Enter
multiple manual assignments simultaneously by leaving a space between each specificity.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
180
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. From the analysis window, type a manual antigen specificity assignment in the field under the
Final Assignment box.
2. Click the Assign button (), just above the Manual Assignment field, or press the Enter
to add the assignment to the Final Assignment results box.
key
Assigning Negative Sample Values
You can assign a negative value to a sample even if analysis shows some positive results.

From the analysis window, click the Assign –ve
button, (located just above the Manual
Assignment field) to force the sample to have a negative value.
Removing Assignments
Specificities can be removed from the Final Assignments results box. You can remove more than one
specificity by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking each specificity you want to remove.

From the analysis window, click to highlight specificities on the Final Assignment list, (hold
down the Ctrl
key to select more than one) and click the Remove
button, (located
below the Final Assignments results box).
Saving Assignments
Lab Technicians and Supervisors can save analysis results for further review and approval. Saved
samples are available for confirmation only by a lab supervisor.

From the analysis window, click the Save
button, located at the bottom right corner of
the analysis window, to save the analysis results for all the specificities currently listed in the
Final Assignments field.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
181
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Fusion automatically moves to the next sample.
For Confirmation, a supervisor needs to access the sample for which you saved the assignments.
You can return to the sample at any time prior to confirmation if you need to make changes. Click
the Reanalyze button and then the Save button again.
Confirming Assignments
Lab supervisors can confirm analysis results. When they do so, samples are marked as Confirmed.
The Confirm button is Purple-colored when you view a confirmed sample.

From the analysis window, click the Confirm
button, located in the bottom right
corner of the window, to confirm all analysis results that have been saved in the Final
Assignments results box.
Fusion automatically moves to the next sample to continue confirming results.
When you first return to a confirmed sample, you’ll see that the Confirm
shaded Purple to let you know it has been confirmed previously.
button is now
Getting Tail Analysis Values (Except Singles)
Tail analysis values can be displayed in the analysis with the final
assignments, but are not stored for look up or reporting.

From the analysis window, click the T button, located to the upper
right of the Final Analysis results box, to display tail analysis
values in Final Assignments results box.
Donor PRA (Except Singles)
You can display the percentage of PRA from available donors in the system or from selected donor
groups who match the computer-assigned antibodies for the current sample.
Note:
To select a donor, or donor groups, click the Donor PRA button. You can also autoselect groups by selecting Utilities > General Settings. To create a donor group, select
Patient Info > Manage Patient, select Donor in the Patient/Donor field, and fill in the
donor group field.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
182
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. For Single Antigen or PRA analysis, click the Donor PRA
(DPRA)
button. A pop-up box displays the percentage of
matching donor PRA and the total number of donors that were
considered in the calculation.
Click OK to close the box. The percentage and number of donors remains
displayed next to the Donor PRA button.
0 % (1)
Calculated PRA
You can perform Calculated PRA (CPRA) analysis by clicking on the CPRA
button, found to
the right of the DPRA button on the lower left panel. Clicking the CPRA button will calculate PRA
(UNOS calculator) using unacceptable antigens assigned to the patient record.
From within the Final Assignment box, select several antigens by highlighting them, then right-click and choose “Add
Unacceptable Antigen.”
Now, click the CPRA button.
The percentage score will
appear next to the CPRA
button. The list of selected
antigens appears below to
the left under the System
Comments area.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
183
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Choosing Minimum Positive Threshold Cutoffs (Except Singles)
You can set the minimum positive threshold cutoffs to use with any LABScreen PRA or Single
Antigen sample. To set the cutoffs for X8 - X2, review the section Changing Antibody Screening
Analysis Configuration. You can then switch between the OLI provided cutoffs and the ones defined
through Fusion by doing the following:

To choose user-defined cutoffs, select the check box next to User Cutoff

To go back to using the OLI cutoffs, clear the User Cutoff check box.
Hiding Tail Analysis Values (Single Antigen)
You can choose to hide the display of Tail analysis values from Single
Antigen sample analysis, but these values remain stored for look up or
reporting.
1. Select the Utilities > Antibody Product Configuration
> Set Analysis Configuration menu option.
2. Select LABScreen Single Antigen from the Product Type drop-down menu at the top
of the display.
3. Select the Hide Tail Analysis Window check box, located at the bottom of the Single
Antigen product configuration dialog box.
4. Click the Save
button at the bottom of the menu.
LABScreen Single Antigen samples imported after this configuration change do not display the tail
analysis assignment area on the sample analysis window.
Navigating Between Class I and Class II (PRA Class I and II Combined)
For Combined Class I and II LABScreen PRA sessions, each class is analyzed separately and needs to be
saved separately for the combined results to appear in the database.
Make sure that you have already created a combined Class I and Class II LABScreen PRA catalog
before you import the combined sessions.

From the analysis window, click the Run Class I and Run Class II buttons
,
located in the upper left part of the analysis window, to switch between Class I and Class II
results for the current sample.
Sort Antigen (Single Antigen)
Single Antigen trays can be sorted in order of specificity, instead of reaction value.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
184
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. For Single Antigen analysis, click the Sort Ag.
Button.
The graph is sorted by bead number.
2. Click the Refresh
button to return to the default graph.
LABScreen Mixed Batch Analysis allows you to quickly analyze a session and save it for later review and
final assignments. You cannot view samples graphically during batch analysis, and no final screening
assignments are made.

Batch analyze a session

View the Batch Analysis report

Save analysis results
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
185
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Overview
After batch analysis is performed, the LABScreen Batch Analysis Report is displayed. Results can be
saved, but they need to be confirmed individually.
Save Batch Analysis
Lab technicians and supervisors can save batch analysis results for further review and approval. Samples
are marked as Ready.
1. Click Save>> at the bottom of the report menu to save all samples to the database.
1. Click Exit to close and return to the Main Menu.
Review/Analyze Samples
To let you view batch results in more detail after saving, the Analyze button displays the session in the
Analysis window. Each sample needs to be saved individually if you did not save the batch analysis
session before reviewing the batch results.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
186
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Navigator Right-Click Menu Options for LABScreen
Note:
These options apply to all LABScreen sessions and samples.
There are analysis options available through the Navigator depending on whether you are in the LABScreen session
summary view, or on an analysis screen for a sample.
By right-clicking on the Current Session in the Navigator
window, you’ll see menu options that allow you to affect your
LABScreen analysis sessions before, during or analysis.
Reanalyze with New Settings/Catalog
Allows the session to be reanalyzed using new
settings or an updated catalog. Here’s how:
1. Click the drop-down arrow in the New
Catalog ID field and select a new catalog
from the list.
2. Rename the session, (Sessions must have
unique names).
3. Click the Analysis
button. The
session on which you right-clicked is
reanalyzed with the catalog you’ve
selected.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
187
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Sample-Level Options
There are two menu options that are displayed if you right-click on an Active Sample in the Navigator,
(select sample first with a left-click):
Sample-level Navigator Options
Related Records
A related record is a record that is associated with the current sample by Patient ID or Sample ID.
Note:
This option is also available by using the Related Records toolbar button
.

Right-click a sample in the Navigator, and select Related Records to load all records related
to the current sample into the Sample drop-down list at the top of the screen. Use the sample
navigation arrows to display the analysis of each related record one by one.

To go back to viewing the samples in the current sessions, click the <<Summary link at the
top of the window.
Side-By-Side Analysis
Use this option to compare the current sample analysis with one previously conducted.
Note:
This option is also available by using the Side-By-Side Analysis
toolbar button.
Side-by-side Analysis Selection List
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
188
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

Right click on a sample from the Navigator, and select Side By Side Analysis. Select a
previous sample analysis from the displayed list to compare to the current one. (The current
sample is displayed with a light brown background.)

The two analysis windows are then displayed together in a comparison window.

Each pane of the window can be resized and moved independently by dragging and dropping.
Click the Side-by-side Analysis toolbar
button to cancel the comparison display.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
189
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
LAT Analysis
The LAT™ analysis feature of the program analyzes CSV output files, manually-entered reaction
patterns, or ELISA results as a new session and can continue the analysis of a previously unfinished
session. Analysis results are based on catalog specifications provided with the software.
There are a few things that should be completed or verified before you start an analysis session:

Make sure you have the latest catalog files before you analyze. You can download or update
catalogs from the LAT Home Page by clicking on
.

View and modify global product configuration settings before starting analysis. Global settings
are displayed and be can be modified on the LAT Home Page by clicking on,
or through
the Utilities Menu . Global settings apply across all newly imported sessions.

Save time importing CSV files by verifying that the default URL’s and paths are pointing to the
locations where these files are commonly stored on your system or network. These settings
can be modified in the Utilities > General Settings section of the default Fusion Home
page.
Note:
Some of the above tasks require you to have Supervisor Privileges. You may have to
verify with your supervisor that these tasks have been completed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
190
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Starting LAT Analysis
Acquiring LAT Session Data
There are four basic methods to import session data for LAT Analysis in HLA Fusion:
1. Manual Entry the data from only one session is manually entered from the keyboard.
2. Batch Entry the data from several sessions are manually entered in a series.
3. CSV file a properly-formatted CSV file is directly imported into Fusion for LAT Analysis.
4. ELISAread analysis data directly from the Biotek ELX 800 ELISA reader.
Click the LAT
button from the Home Page panel, or the LAT
to open the LAT program.
icon on the Fusion Toolbar
The LAT Home page is displayed.
Click to modify LAT
global se ttings.
Place a
check mark
here to
include
previously
imported
CSV files.
Click to open the
Available Reference
File Update window
Click to
open the
Catalog
Manager
CSV File
list
Click these links
to display
selected catalog,
worksheet documents.
Note:
Open worksheets to verify the accuracy of revision numbers, (these documents do not
contain a revision number in their filename).
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
191
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Single Session Manual Entry
To manually enter a single session for LAT Analysis, do the
following:
1. Click the Manual Entry button at the top of the LAT
Home panel.
2. In the top text field of the next window,
enter a unique name for the new manuallyentered LAT Analysis session.
3. Click the DownArrow of the Select
Product Catalog field and select the
appropriate LAT Product Catalog.
4. Next, type in the correct Test Date, or click
the DownArrow to reveal the pop-up
calendar and select the test date.
5. Click the Next
button.
The Data Input Menu displays.
This allows you to input reaction values for a new sample.
You can enter the samples and reactions into a session—a 10 test tray,
or a 20 test tray. Data may be entered manually by clicking on each
well, or by obtaining raw data values from an ELISA reader.
6. Enter a Sample Name(s). A unique Sample Name is required
for analysis. The Sample Date may be changed here if necessary.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
192
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Manual Batch Entry
To manually enter a more than one session for analysis, do the following:
1. Click the Batch Entry button.
A blank Session Summary Screen opens.
Unlike Manual Entry which is limited to just one session, Batch Entry allows you to enter a group of
sessions with the Session Summary screen. This allows you enter data in a tabular format with each row
representing one session.
2. Enter a unique name for this batch, or accept the default
batch name which Fusion suggests.
3. Manually select and/or enter session data beginning
with the HLA class, (I, II, Class I PRA + Class II PRA
and Single Class I) at the left side of the Session
Summary Screen and continue to the right until all the
available data for a session has been entered.
The fields with an asterisk () are required. This includes the fields that are completed by using dropdowns, (Catalog Name and Test Date) and the Session ID.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
193
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Continue entering session data as needed. Note that once you’ve entered data for a session and have
started entering data for the next session, you cannot return to the previous line of session data.
However, after a batch has been saved it can be reopened and edited.
4. When all data for a batch of sessions has
been entered, click the Save
button at the bottom of the screen. The
batch has been saved and is included in
the list of Existing Batches in the
drop-down list at the top of the screen.
5. After you’re finished entering session data for this batch, click the Next
button.
Similar to Manual Input of Session data as discussed previously, the Data Input Menu and the main LAT
Analysis window appears.
Importing CSV files in LAT
1. Click the Folder
Icon to open the Select CSV Files list.
2. Select one or more sessions from the Select CSV Files list.
3. Click the Open
button.
The CSV Files are now displayed in the CSV File Name List.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
194
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
You may see CSV files for products other than LAT, or other miscellaneous CSV files. This
means that you must first click on a sub folder for LAT, or that your LAT session files are
not contained within their own folder in the directory to which HLA Fusion is pointing.
4. Click on a CSV file to display its associated samples in the Current Sample/Patient Details
table.
Current Sample/Patient Details Table
If a sample is already associated with a patient, the Patient ID and any existing, related patient
information is displayed.
To add patient information, do one of the following:
1. To add data from the system, click the Patient List
button.
The Import Patient window is displayed, allowing you to import the patient information file.
Click the
Browse Button
to locate
Patient
Information
lists.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
195
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To manually add Patient Data, simply type data into the patient-related fields of the table.

You can have Fusion assign the Sample ID
to empty Patient ID fields by checking the
box for assigning the Sample ID to empty
Patient IDs.
2. The system assigns a Session ID by default. Optionally, you can type in a different Session ID.
Note:
A session ID must be unique to the Fusion database. If the session ID already exists, the
software prompts you to rename the session. It is highly recommended that you not use
any special characters in this field since they may serve a specific purpose as field
separators.
3. Accept the displayed Catalog file, or select a Catalog file from the drop-down list in the
Catalog ID field.
Note:
If you need to import more catalogs, click the Download
link on the LAT Home
page. The catalog drop-down list may not be immediately updated if you downloaded
the catalogs during the current import session. You may need to click the Home button
and then click the LAT
button again to return to the import process.
4. When session and sample information have been verified,
click the Import
button. The session is now
displayed in the Fusion Navigator tree on the right side of
the analysis screen for subsequent analysis.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
196
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
You can select a session from the Fusion Navigator to view its summary; then select a sample from the
session summary to view its analysis. Or, you can continue importing samples from the Import Sample
list.
5. In the Navigator, click on a Session Name. The Session Summary Table is displayed:

Double-click a sample in the Summary Table to go directly to the analysis screen for this
sample.

Scroll left or right to display all of the Summary Table fields.

Click on the Field Chooser button to the left of the table headings. In this window, you can
select or clear the check boxes next to column headings to include or exclude those columns from
the Summary Table. Selecting or clearing check boxes in this window instantly updates the table.
Note:
If you do not see a particular field available through the field chooser, and you are sure
it should be there, go to C:\HLA Fusion\temp and delete the file named X_X_X(antigen
type)_Layout.xml.

Click on any column header of the Summary Table to sort the table by that column. The arrow
in the column header indicates the sorting order - up for ascending and down for descending.
Columns can also be dragged-and-dropped to change their order.

The session summary table columns and order can be modified. When you close the Field
Chooser, a pop-up message displays to let you choose whether or not to save any changes
you made. If you click Yes, your changes are saved for all future LAT session summaries on
this same computer until further modifications are saved.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
197
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand

HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Click the Export button to save the Summary Table on your computer or the network,
(default locations C:\OLI FUSION\data\report). The file is saved in Excel (*.xls) format.
Summary Table exported as an Excel spreadsheet

Click Print to print out a report of the Summary Table.

Click Preview to view a report of the Summary Table.
Print/Preview Summary Table

In the print preview window, the page view slider on the left allows you to select different pages of
the report.

The session summary table columns and order can be modified. You can save any modifications
you make to the layout by clicking the Save Layout button. Your changes are saved for all future
LAT session summaries on the same computer until further modifications are made and saved.
If you want to exclude a sample from an analysis session, select the Exclude check box next for that
sample. The sample is still displayed on the Reports sample list; to prevent it from being included in
report data, do not select that sample during report creation.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
198
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the LAT Mixed Analysis Window
For each sample in the current session, you can view the test data and assign screening results. HLA
Fusion analyzes a sample when you move to view that sample. To analyze an entire session, you must
view all samples in the session and assign the results.
From the analysis window you can:

View and print sample analysis results

Circle antigens in the specificity table

Sort by well position

Add comments and mark the sample for more testing

View a Quick Report for the current sample

Export reaction data to a CSV file
Note:
You can return to a session summary from the analysis window any time by clicking the
<<Summary link from the HLA Fusion toolbar next to the sample/session ID.
LAT Mixed Analysis Screen
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
199
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Entering Data and Reaction Pattern
The data input menu displays the current reaction for an existing sample or allows you to input reaction
values for a new sample. This area allows you to enter the samples and reactions into a session—10 test
tray, or 20 test tray. Data may be entered manually or by obtaining raw data values from ELISA reader.
Data input and reaction pattern (10 test tray)

The format of the data input section mimics an LAT mixed analysis worksheet. The reaction
input panel has a tray layout. The row of wells for the current test is highlighted by a blue
rectangle.

Each well is a button that cycles through reaction values (1, 8, 6, 4, 2, 0). Buttons are colorcoded to match the reactions.

You can enter reactions by clicking a button and typing a reaction value, or by clicking the
button until it displays the desired reaction. When the button changes, the focus shifts to the
next button.

Button navigation occurs from left to right (1A –1F, 2A – 2F…etc.).

Where the product has a blank well, the corresponding reaction button is disabled.

Sample list/entry for the tray is listed along the side of the panel. You must enter a sample ID
before the reaction can be saved to the database. The session does not require that all wells of
the tray be used.

Once you analyze a tray, you can no longer add any more sample information to that tray.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
200
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the ELISA Reader
To read analysis data directly from the Biotek ELX 800 ELISA reader, the computer on which you are
running HLA Fusion must be connected to the ELISA reader. Connect and calibrate the ELISA reader
according to product specifications. HLA Fusion can analyze only 96-well Terasaki trays. ELISA reads the
trays, and transfers the raw data to HLA Fusion.

From the analysis window, click Read From to import data from the ELISA reader.
The Read From button is displayed only when your computer is connected to the ELISA
reader, and you have not yet entered any manual reactions for the current test.
Note:
Histogram for LAT Mixed analysis
LAT Mixed Histogram
This histogram displays the reaction value for each well position of the current tray in a session. It also
displays the average negative control wells for the test group as a narrow light green bar superimposed on
each reaction well bar.
Wells are sorted by test groups; Class I, Class II and control wells are sorted together.

X-axis shows the well position.

Y-axis lists ranges of reaction values (e.g., 1 to 10).
Bars are color-coded based on their reaction value:

8 = Red

6 = Orange

4 = Gold

2 = Blue

1 = Green
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
201
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Horizontal lines represent the positive threshold you set for Class I and Class II. The line(s) assumes the
same color as the RXN color code.
Making Assignments
The Final Assignment option buttons display the software-suggested assignment, (Positive, Negative
or Undetermined). To accept the assignment, save or confirm the sample, (see the following sections).
To modify the suggested assignment, do the following:
1. From the analysis window, select an assignment for each Class using the Final Assignment
option buttons— Positive, Negative or Undetermined.
LAT Assignments area
Save Assignments
Lab Technicians and Supervisors can save analysis results for further review and approval. Saved
samples are available for confirmation only by a Lab Supervisor.

From the analysis window, click the Save
button, located in the bottom right corner of the
analysis window, to save analysis results for all the specificities currently listed in the Final
Assignments results box.
Fusion automatically moves to the next sample.
For confirmation, a Supervisor needs to access the sample for which you saved the assignments. You
can return to the sample any time prior to confirmation. If you need to make changes, click the
Reanalyze
button and then the Save
button again.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
202
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Confirm Assignments
Only Lab Supervisors can confirm analysis results. When they do so, samples are marked as Confirmed.
The Confirm button is Purple when you view a confirmed sample.

From the analysis window, click the Confirm button
of the window, to confirm all analysis results.
, located in the bottom right corner
You automatically move to the next sample to continue confirming results.
When you first return to a confirmed sample, you see that the Confirm
shaded purple to let you know it has been confirmed before.
button is now
Adding Comments to Samples
Comments you or Fusion add to the Comments fields are displayed with the results in the current
analysis session, data look up and reporting functions in HLA Fusion.

In the analysis window, enter sample comments into the Comment field below the Assignments
area.
Double-click in
either text field
Type your own comments in this area
System comments automatically added here
to open the larger
comments window
Comments are saved only after you click the Save or Confirm buttons.
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing
You can indicate the need for further testing of a sample by selecting the More Tests check box and then
saving.
The More Tests indication is displayed in results, data look up and reports for the sample.
1. In the analysis window, check the More Tests
Assignments area at the bottom, right.
2. Click Save
or Confirm
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
check box, located below the
to preserve the setting.
203
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Adding Tray Information
You can add information about the current tray, such as expiration date, by clicking the Info
button. The following dialog box is displayed when you click this button, allowing you to add
information about this sample tray.
labsupervisor1
Exporting Session Data
You can click the Export button
(located at the bottom, right above the Save>> button) to export
session data into a file similar to the Luminex output CSV format.
If you have a separate workstation for ELISA and analysis, the exported file can be imported for analysis
and used on another computer.
Raw Data Table
Positive beads are displayed in Red text. Rows highlighted in Yellow have normalized values over the
minimum value.
Changes made to the normalization formula and the minimum normalized value apply only to the raw
data table and not to analysis.
1. From the analysis window, click the Raw
to display raw data table.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
button at the bottom right of the analysis window
204
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Raw Data table
Click a column header to sort the table by that category.
Click the Exit
analysis.
button at the upper right corner of the table to close the window and to return to
Raw Data Quick Report
For easier navigation, exporting and printing, you can create a report containing raw data information for
the current sample.
Once the Raw Data Table is displayed, click the Report
Raw Data table window to display a report of the raw data.
Click the Exit
analysis.
button at the bottom right portion of the
button at the upper right corner of the table to close the window and to return to
Click the Print Screen
Data Table.
Click the Printer
Click either the Exit
button to display a preview of the currently visible portion of the Raw
button at the top left of the window to send the image directly to the printer.
or Close
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
buttons to close the window and to return to analysis.
205
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Printing the Current Analysis Window
The Print Screen button sends the currently displayed analysis window to the default printer for your
computer.

From the analysis window, click the Print Screen button
currently visible portion of the analysis screen.
on the Fusion toolbar to print the
Previewing and Printing Reports
To view or print an Antibody Screening Mixed Data report for the current sample, use the Preview
Report button on the toolbar.

Note:
In the analysis window, click the Preview Report
button or the Print Report
button to display a list
of reports you can print or preview for the current
sample.
If you select Antibody Custom, you cannot create a new custom report at this point. The
only custom reports available from the analysis window are ones you previously created
through the Reports window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
206
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the LAT PRA/Single Antigen Analysis Window
This window provides detailed analysis information for each sample in the session. It allows you to
review the specificity assignments suggested by the program and to modify and accept the assignments.
HLA Fusion suggests possible screening results, but the final assignment must be made by the user.
From the analysis window menu you can do the following:


Note:
Select minimum positive threshold
Exclude selected, or Cw specificities
You can return to a session summary from the analysis window any time by clicking the
<<Summary link from the HLA Fusion toolbar next to the sample/session ID.
LAT PRA/Single Antigen Analysis
Entering the Reaction Pattern
Click each well to change its reaction value, or type a reaction value when the well is highlighted. Wells
with white borders are control wells; wells with black borders are reaction wells.
1. From the analysis window, type a sample name into the Top/Bottom Sample fields and press
the Enter
key, (for two test trays, enter both top and bottom sample names).
2. Enter reaction patterns by clicking on wells to change the reaction value. Or, select a well and type
the reaction value.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
207
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
3. Click the Reanalyze
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
button.
There is no requirement that all wells of a tray be used.
The tray input is a group of buttons representing each well. The buttons cycle through reaction values
when clicked (1, 8, 6, 4, 2, 0). By default, 1 is displayed. The colors of the buttons reflect the values
entered: 1=Green, 2=light blue, 4=magenta; 6=red; 8=dark blue.
You can enter reactions by clicking a button and typing a reaction value, or by clicking the button until it
displays the desired reaction. When the button reaction value changes, the focus shifts to the next button.
Button navigation is from left to right (1A –1F,2A – 2F, etc.).
The image of the tray, (button order, well position, etc.) emulates the actual LAT tray that is run. So for a
2 test tray, the top of the tray is shown first for the first sample and the bottom half of the tray is shown
second, for the second sample. When you add a new tray, the top half is displayed first, then the bottom
half, if applicable.
You can add information about the tray, such as expiration date, by clicking the + Info
button. The
More Test Information dialog box is displayed when you click this button, allowing you to add
information about this tray:
Add Test Tray Information
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
208
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the ELISA Reader
To import analysis data directly from the Biotek ELX 800 NB ELISA reader, the computer on which you
are running HLA Fusion must be connected to the ELISA reader. Connect and calibrate the ELISA reader
according to product specifications. HLA Fusion can analyze only 96-well Terasaki trays. ELISA reads the
trays, and transfers the raw data to HLA Fusion.

Note:
From the analysis window, click the Read From ELISA button to import data from the ELISA
reader.
The Read From button is displayed only when your computer is connected to the ELISA
reader, and you have not yet entered any manual reactions for the current test.
LAT PRA/Single Antigen Histogram
Displays the reaction of the sample.
Histogram for LAT PRA/Single antigen

Y-axis = reactivity; X-axis = well position and sample order.

By default, the histogram is sorted from highest reaction to lowest. You can also click the Sort by
Well Position button to sort it that way.

Bars are colored according to reaction: 1=Green, 2=
light blue, 4=yellow; 6=brown; 8=red.

When you hover your cursor over a bar, a pop-up
window displays Bead ID, Tray Position, Rxn, Raw Data,
Threshold, Well Specificity.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
209
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
CREG Table
The CREG groups are displayed at the top of the table, with the specificities for the group displayed
below. Specificities are highlighted in one of the following colors.
Note:
If you want to hide the display of the CREG bar, click the CREG title at the top of the
window. A dialog box displays asking if you want to hide the CREG bar. Click Yes to hide it.
To re-display it, click again on the CREG title and click the Yes button to show it.

Purple = positive assignments from the Epitope Analysis Results box

Pink = Tail assignments that are masked by Epitope analysis

Blue = Cw assignments

Green = Bw4 and Bw6 assignments

Click a CREG group or antigens to circle the corresponding specificities.

Right-click an antigen to move the specificity to the Final Assignments box.
Do the following if you want to use a different CREG table:
1. Click the LAT Home Page
button,
or select Utilities > Antibody Product
Configuration > Set Analysis
Configuration.
2. On the LAT Home page, click the [Edit] link to
display the Analysis Configuration
Settings dialog box, (this dialog box is
displayed already if you are accessing it
through the Utilities menu).
3. Select a different table from the CREG drop-down list.
4. Click the Save
button at the bottom of this screen.
Find Antigen
All entered antigens are circled in the specificity field. To enter multiple antigens, use a space to separate
antigen entries. Clicking on the labels for Tail Analysis Results, Epitope Analysis Results, or Final
Assignment creates circles around the specificities listed in the results area. Clicking on the “Exclude
Antigen” label circles the excluded antigens.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
210
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Note: If you use the Find Antigen feature while the window is displaying molecular specificities, you
cannot see the circled antigens until you deselect the DNA check box.
1. From the analysis window, type individual antigens or CREG groups, (e.g., 1C or 2C) into the
field next to the Find Ag, (Antigen) button.
2. Click the Find Ag button to circle the entered antigens or CREG groups.
3. Click the Find Ag button again to remove the circles from antigens in the specificity field.
View Molecular Specificities
Molecular specificities are displayed only in the specificity field of the analysis window. The CREG Table
and screening results are displayed and saved as serological specificities.
1. In the Analysis Window, select the DNA check box to display molecular specificities.
2. Clear the check box to return the display to serological specificities.
Select Minimum Positive Threshold
You can change the minimum positive threshold using the pull-down menu.

From the analysis window, select a new positive threshold from the Threshold drop-down list
next to the analysis tools near the top of the window. The sample is re-analyzed according to the
new threshold. The effects of the threshold change are displayed in the result boxes.
Exclude Antigen from Analysis
To enter multiple antigens, use a comma to separate the antigen entries. All antigens entered are
excluded from analysis.
1. From the analysis window, click the Excl. Ag. button. The Exclude Antigen pop-up box is displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
211
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
2. Type in antigens to be excluded, separated by commas and click
OK.
The sample is re-analyzed and the excluded antigens are listed in the
Excluded Antigens field in the Analysis Statistics box.
3. To include all these antigens again, click the Excl. Ag button
again; click Clear to remove antigens from the field; and then
click OK to re-analyze with these antigens included.
Include/Exclude Cw
You can choose to include or exclude Cw antigen specificities from analysis.

Near the top of the analysis window, select the Cw check box to re-analyze with Cw specificities.
Clear the Cw check box to re-analyze without Cw specificities.
Navigating Between Class I & Class II
(PRA Class I & II Combined)
For Combined Class I and II PRA sessions, each HLA class is analyzed separately and needs to be saved
separately for combined results to appear in the database.
Make sure that you have already created a combined Class I and Class II LAT PRA catalog file before you
import the combined sessions).

In the Analysis Window, click either the Run Class I or Run Class II buttons, located in the
upper middle part of the analysis window to switch between Class I and Class II results for the
current sample.
(After you click on the Run Class I button and the analysis is completed, the button changes to
Run Class II, and vice versa.)
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
212
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Raw Data Table
Positive beads are displayed in Red text. Rows highlighted in yellow have normalized values over the
minimum value. Changes made to the normalization formula and minimum normalized value, apply only
to the raw data table and not to analysis.
1. From the analysis window, click the Raw button on the bottom right of the analysis window to
display the raw data table.
Take one or more of the following actions:

Click on a header at the top of any row to sort the table by that category.

Click the Report button to create a Raw Data Table report.

Click the Print Screen button to print what you see on the screen.

Click the Close button to close the window and to return to analysis.
Raw Data Report
You can create a report containing raw data information for the current sample.

Once the Raw Data Table is displayed, click the Report button at the bottom right portion of the
Raw Data Table window to display a report of the raw data.
Exporting Session Data
You can click the Export button to export sample data into a comma-separated output file. This file can
be imported for analysis. This feature is can be used if you have a separate workstation for ELISA and
analysis.
Donor PRA
You can display the percentage of PRA from available donors in the system or from selected donor
groups who match the computer-assigned antibodies for the current sample.
Note:
To select a donor group(s), select Utilities > General Settings. To create a donor group,
select Patient Info > Manage Patient, select Donor in the Patient/Donor field, and fill in
the donor group field.
1. For Single Antigen or PRA analysis, click the DPRA button. A pop-up box displays the percentage
of matching donor PRA and the total number of donors that were considered in the calculation.
2. Click OK to close the box. The percentage and number of donors remains displayed next to the
Donor PRA button.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
213
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Calculated PRA
You can perform Calculated PRA (CPRA) analysis by clicking on the CPRA
button, found
to the right of the DPRA button on the lower left panel. Clicking the CPRA button will calculate PRA
(UNOS calculator) using unacceptable antigens assigned to the patient record.
1. From within the Final Assignment box, select
several antigens by highlighting them, then rightclick and choose “Add Unacceptable Antigen.”
2. Now, click the CPRA button.
The percentage score will appear next to the CPRA button as a percentage.
The list of selected antigens appears below
to the left under the
System Comments
area.
Adding Comments to Samples
Comments that you or Fusion add to the Comments Field are displayed with the results in the current
analysis session, data look up and reporting functions in HLA Fusion.
 In the analysis window, type sample comments into the Comment field below the Assignments
area.
You may click and drag the bottom right corner to resize the Comments box. Comments are only saved
after you click the Save button after completion of the analysis.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
214
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing
Marking a sample for more testing displays the More Tests check box for the sample’s results in the
current analysis session in all analysis, data look up and reporting functions in HLA Fusion.

In the analysis window, check the More Tests check box, located below the Epitope Analysis
Results section.
Previewing and Printing Reports
To view or print an LAT PRA/SA report for the current sample, click the
Preview Report button on the Fusion toolbar.

Note:
In the analysis window, click the Preview Report button or
Print Report button to display a list of reports you can print or
preview for the current sample.
If you select Molecular Custom, you cannot create a new custom report at this point. The
only custom reports available from the analysis window are those previously created
through the Reports window.
Making Final Assignments
Final assignments can be made from either the Tail or Epitope results lists. Once a specificity has been
moved to the Final Assignments area, it no longer displays in its initial results box.
From the analysis window, do one of the following to make assignments:

Double-click an antigen specificity in the Tail or Epitope Analysis results box to list the
specified antigen in the Final Assignment field.

Click to highlight the specificity and click the Assign Single button to move it to the Final
Assignment list.

Click the Assign All button to the right of the Tail or Epitope list to move all the current results
on that list to the Final Assignments area.

Right-click on a specificity, or CREG group on the CREG Table to assign it to the Final
Assignments area.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
215
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Manual Assignments
Manual assignments can be entered in the field below the Final Assignments results box. Enter multiple
manual assignments by leaving a space between each specificity.
1. From the Analysis Window, type a manual antigen specificity assignment in the field under the
Final Assignment box.
2. Click the Assign button , just above the Manual Assignment field to add the assignment to the
Final Assignment results box.
Assigning Negative Sample Values
You can assign a negative value to a sample even if analysis shows some positive results.

From the analysis window, click the Assign -ve
button, (located just above the Manual
Assignment field) to assign all samples on the Final Assignment results box a negative value.
Removing Assignments
Specificities can be removed from the Final Assignments results field. You can remove more than one
specificity by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking each specificity you want to remove.

From the analysis window, click to highlight specificities on the Final Assignment list, (hold down
the CTRL key to select more than one) and click the Remove
button, located below the Final
Assignments results field.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
216
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Save Assignments
Lab Technicians and Supervisors can save analysis results for further review and approval. Saved
samples are available for confirmation only by a lab supervisor.

From the analysis window, click the Save >>button, (located in the bottom right corner of the
analysis window) to save analysis results for all the specificities currently listed in the Final
Assignments results box.
You automatically move to the next sample.
For confirmation, a Supervisor needs to access the sample for which you saved the assignments. You can
return to the sample any time prior to confirmation. If you need to make changes, click the Reanalyze
button and then the Save button again.
Confirm Assignments
Only Lab Supervisors can confirm analysis results. When they do so, samples are marked as Confirmed.
The Confirm button is purple when you view a confirmed sample.

From the analysis window, click the Confirm button, located in the bottom right corner of the
window, to confirm all analysis results.
You automatically move to the next sample to continue confirming results.
When you first return to a confirmed sample, you see that the Confirm button is now shaded purple to
let you know it has been confirmed before.
Getting Tail Analysis Values
Tail analysis values can be displayed in the Final Assignments results field, but are not
stored for look up or reporting.

From the analysis window, click the button, located to the upper right of the
Final Analysis results box, to display tail analysis values in Final Assignments
results field.

LAT Single Antigen samples imported after this configuration change do not
display the tail analysis assignment area on the sample analysis window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
217
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Navigating Between Class I & Class II
(PRA Class I and II Combined)
For Combined Class I and II LABScreen PRA sessions, each HLA class is analyzed separately and needs
to be saved separately for combined results to appear in the database.
Make sure that you have already created a combined Class I and Class II LABScreen PRA catalog file
before you import the combined sessions.

From the analysis window, click Run Class I and Run Class II buttons, located in the upper
left part of the analysis window, to switch between Class I and Class II results for the current
sample.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
218
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Navigator Right-Click Menu Options for LAT
Note:
These options apply to all LAT sessions and samples.
There are analysis options available through the Navigator—depending on whether you are in the LAT
session summary view, or on an analysis screen for a sample.
By right-clicking on either a session or a sample in the Navigator window, you access menu options that
allow you to affect your LAT analysis sessions before or during analysis.
Navigator Session-level menu options
Reanalyze with New Catalog
Allows a session to be reanalyzed using a new or updated catalog.
1. Right-click on the session in the Fusion Navigator
and select Reanalyze using New
Settings/Catalog.
2. Rename the session giving it a new Session ID.
3. Click the drop-down arrow in the New Catalog ID
field and select a new catalog from the list.
4. Click the Analysis button.
The session on which you right-clicked is reanalyzed using a new Session ID with the catalog you just
selected.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
219
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Sample-Level Options
The Related Records and Side By Side Analysis options are displayed if you right-click on an active
sample in the Navigator, (first select the sample with a left-click):
Related Records
A related record is a record that is associated with the current sample by patient or sample ID.
Note:
This option is also available by using the Related Records toolbar button.
 Select this menu option to load all records related to the current sample into the Sample dropdown list. Use the sample navigation arrows to display the analysis of each related record one by
one.
 To go back to viewing the samples in the current sessions, click the <<Summary link at the top
of the window.
Side By Side Analysis
Use this option to compare the current sample analysis with a sample analysis previously conducted.
Note:

This option is also available by using the Side By Side Analysis toolbar button.
Select a sample to compare to the current one.
The two analysis windows are then displayed together in a comparison window.

Each window can be resized and moved by dragging and dropping.
Click the Side-By-Side Analysis toolbar button again to cancel the comparison display.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
220
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
FlowPRA Analysis
The FlowPRA analysis feature of the HLA Fusion program analyzes manually-entered reaction values as
a new session. Analysis results are based on catalog specifications provided with HLA Fusion software.
There are a few things that should be completed or verified before you start a FlowPRA analysis session:

Make sure you have the latest catalog files and serology equivalent reference files before you
analyze. You can download or update catalogs from the FlowPRA Home Page.

View and modify global- as well as product-specific configuration settings before starting analysis.
Global settings apply across all newly imported sessions.

Save time importing catalogs and files by verifying that the default URLs and paths are pointing
to the locations where these files are commonly stored on your system or network. These settings
can also be modified in the General Configuration section of the HLA Fusion default Home page.
Note:
Some of the above tasks require you to have Supervisor User privileges. You may have to
verify with your supervisor that these tasks have been completed.
Starting FlowPRA Analysis
Acquiring FlowPRA Data
1. Select the FlowPRA button from the home page panel or the Fusion toolbar.
The FlowPRA Home page is displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
221
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Open worksheets and probe/primer sheets to verify the accuracy of revision numbers
(these documents do not contain a revision number in their filename).
2. Click the Batch Entry Button.
The FlowPRA Batch Entry Screen is displayed:
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
222
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Notice that Fusion has automatically assigned a session name. Optionally, you can rename the session.
Note:
A session ID or batch name must be unique to the Fusion database. If the session ID already
exists, the software prompts you to rename the session. It is also highly recommended that
you do not use any special characters in this field since they may serve a specific purpose
as field separators.
3. Click the drop-down arrow in the Class column (on the extreme right hand side) to select the HLA
class: Class I, Class II, Single Class I or Single Class II.
Note:
If you need to import more catalogs, click the Download link on the FlowPRA home page. The
catalog drop-down list may not be immediately updated if you downloaded the catalogs during this
import session. You may need to click the Home button and then click the FlowPRA button again
to return to the import process.
4. Use the drop-down menu in the Product Catalog field (on the immediate left) to select an appropriate
catalog file to use for analysis:

Accept the current date or select a different test date and click Next>. The analysis
window for this session is displayed.
Note: In the Catalog drop-down field, Fusion only lists those product catalogs which belong to the
HLA Class you selected in the Class drop-down field.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
223
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

Each FlowPRA session consists of as many samples as you wish to analyze with the same
catalog information. You may also begin FlowPRA analysis on previously existing, or previously entered batches by clicking the drop-down arrow on the right side of the Existing
Batches field near the top center of the screen (shown below).

If the existing batch is not displayed, adjust the date range of the Batch Date and click
the Find button to locate the missing batch(s):
Note: If you need to import more catalogs, click the [Download] link on the MicroSSP Home Page. The
catalog drop-down list may not be immediately updated if you downloaded the catalogs during the current
import session. You may need to click the Home button and then click the MicroSSP button again to return to the import process.
Note: Data entry is required for any fields with an asterisk(*).
5. Click anywhere in the Session field to accept the name which Fusion provides in the Session*
field, or modify it.
6. Click the down arrow to open a calendar and select a Test Date*.
7. Enter a name in the Sample Name* field.
FlowPRA Analysis Screens
Analyzing FlowPRA samples is similar to the LCT product. Please follow the steps outlined in the LCT
sections.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
224
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
LCT Analysis
The LCT analysis feature of the program analyzes manually-entered reaction values as a new session.
Analysis results are based on catalog specifications provided with the HLA Fusion software.
There are a few things that should be completed or verified before you start an analysis session:

Make sure you have the latest catalog files, as well as NMDP code, local code (if used), or serology
equivalent reference files before you analyze. You can download or update catalogs from the LCT
Home Page.

View and modify global product configuration settings before starting analysis. Global settings are
displayed and be can be modified on the LCT Home Page. Global settings apply across all newly
imported sessions.

Save time importing catalogs and files by verifying that the default URLs and paths are pointing
to the locations where these files are commonly stored on your system or network. These settings
can also be modified in the General Configuration section of the Fusion default Home page.
Note:
Some of the above tasks require you to have Supervisor User privileges. You may have to
verify with your supervisor that these tasks have been completed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
225
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Starting LCT Analysis
Acquiring LCT Data
1. Select LCT button from the home page panel
or the Fusion toolbar
.
The LCT Home page is displayed.
Note:
If you are not using the default Fusion user interface, the data and links shown on the right
side of the window are not displayed.
Click to modify
LCT Global
settings
Click to open the Update
Reference File window
Click to open the
Catalog Manager
window
Click these
links
to display the
selected
catalog,
worksheet, or
probe/primer
documents.
The LCT Home Page
Note:
Open worksheets and probe/primer sheets to verify the accuracy of revision numbers
(these documents do not contain a revision number in their filename).
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
226
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
3. Click the Batch Entry Button.
The LCT Batch Entry Screen is displayed.
Notice that Fusion has automatically assigned a session name. Optionally, you can rename the session.
Note:
A session ID must be unique to the Fusion database. If the session ID already exists, the
software prompts you to rename the session. It is also highly recommended that you do not
use any special characters in this field since they may serve a specific purpose as field
separators.
5. Use the drop-down menu in the Catalog field to select a catalog file.
Note:
If you need to import more catalogs, click the Download link on the LCT home page.
The catalog drop-down list may not be immediately updated if you downloaded the
catalogs during this import session. You may need to click the Home button and then click
the LCT button again to return to the import process.
4. Accept the current date or select a different test date and click Next>. The analysis window for
this session is displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
227
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
LCT Analysis Window
Each LCT session consists of as many samples as you wish to analyze with the same catalog information.
LCT Session Summary Screen
The Summary Table can be launched by clicking a session in the Navigation tree. It lists each sample in
the session. This option allows you to quickly analyze a session, and save it for later review and final
assignments.
Field Chooser
Donor PRA Fields
LCT Session Summary Table

Double-click a sample in the Summary Table or a data point to go directly to the analysis screen
for this sample.

Scroll left or right to view all of the Summary Table fields.

Click the Field Chooser button to the left of the column heading row. The Field Chooser
window is displayed. In this window, you can select or clear the check boxes next to column
headings to include or exclude those columns from the Summary Table. Selecting or clearing
check boxes in this window instantly updates the table.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
228
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
If you do not see a particular field available through the field chooser, and you are sure it
should be there, go to C:\HLA Fusion\temp and delete the file named X_X_X(antigen
type)_Layout.xml.
LCT Session Summary
Field Chooser

Click on any column header of the Summary Table to sort the table by
that column. The arrow in the column header indicates the sorting
order—up for ascending and down for descending. Columns can also
be dragged-and-dropped to change their order.

The session summary table columns and order can be modified.
When you close the Field Chooser, a pop-up message displays to let
you choose whether or not to save any changes you made. If you click
Yes, your changes are saved for all future LCT session summaries on
this same computer until further modifications are saved.

Click the Export button to save the Summary Table on your
computer or the network (default location is C:\OLI
FUSION\data\report). The file is saved in Excel (*.XLS) format.

Click Print to print out a report of the Summary Table.

Click Preview to view a report of the Summary Table.
LCT Session Summary exported as a spreadsheet file
LCT Session Summary Print Preview

In the print preview window, the page view slider on the left allows you to select different pages of
the report.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
229
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

The Summary Table columns and order can be modified. You can save any modifications you
make to the layout by clicking the Save Layout button
. Your changes are saved for all
future LCT session summary tables on this same computer until further changes are saved.

If you want to exclude a sample from an analysis session, select the Exclude check box next for
that sample. The sample is still displayed on the Reports sample list, so to prevent it from being
included in report data, do not select that sample during report creation.
Note:
Certain columns of data are considered key, and cannot be excluded for longer than the
current display of the Summary Table. If you exclude one of these fields, its column is not
displayed until you navigate elsewhere in the application. If you return to this Summary
Table from a sample analysis window or the Navigator, that column is re-displayed. The
data columns considered key is product-specific.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
230
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the LCT Analysis window
For each LCT sample in the current session, you can view the test data, adjust the cut-off, and assign
screening results. There are several tasks you can perform from the LCT analysis window:

Review data and assign specificities

Circle antigens in the specificity table

View molecular specificities

View screening results

Add comments and mark the sample for more testing

View a report for the current sample
Baseline Threshold
setting
Antigen Search box
Click to sort by
well position
Bead
Graph
Reaction
Input Pane
Specificities
Analysis
tools
CREG Bar
Final
Assignment
area
Stats
Table
Comments Area
(double-click t o expa nd it)
Click to display
% Donor PRA
Select if more
tests are
required
Click to
calculate
% Donor PRA
Click to
display results
as Raw data
Save and
Confirm
buttons
LCT Analysis Window
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
231
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Reaction Input and Analysis Pane
The pane in the upper left of the window displays each bead grouping of the test on a separate tab. Each
bead is listed with specificity and reaction button.
To switch between panes, click on the tab of the selected bead group.
When clicked, the reaction for the selected bead switches between the following numbers and colors:
Reaction Input &
Analysis pane

1 (green)

8 (red)

6 (orange)

4 (gold)

2 (light blue)

0 (gray)

If you change a reaction button, the focus shifts to the next button. You can also manually type
in reactions instead of clicking buttons.

This panel launches the analysis of the current sample using the latest changes in reaction.

If the sample has not been analyzed yet, the button is labeled Analyze. If analysis already exists
for the sample, then the button is labeled ReAnalyze. This button is only enabled when a
Sample ID has been entered. If a sample ID has not been entered when this button is clicked, the
sample ID field is flagged with !, and no analysis is performed.
Adding Tray Information
You can add information about the current tray, such as expiration date, by clicking the +Info button
. The following dialog box is displayed when you click this button, allowing you to add information
about this sample tray.
Add Tray Information screen
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
232
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Find Antigen
To enter multiple antigens, use a space to separate antigen entries. All entered antigens are circled in the
specificity field. Clicking on the labels for Tail Analysis Results, Epitope Analysis Results, or Final
Assignment creates circles around the specificities listed in the results area. Clicking on the “Exclude
Antigen” label circles the excluded antigens.
Note:
If you use the Find Antigen feature while the window is displaying molecular specificities,
you cannot see the circled antigens until you deselect the DNA check box.
1. From the analysis window, type antigens or CREG groups (e.g., 1C or 2C) into the field next to the
Find Ag (Antigen) button.
2. Click the Find Ag button
to circle the entered antigens or CREG groups.
Click the Find Ag button again to remove the circles form antigens in the specificity field.
CREG Table
The CREG groups are displayed at the top of the table, with the specificities for the group displayed
below. Specificities are highlighted in one of the following colors.
Note:
If you want to hide the display of the CREG bar, click the CREG title at the top of the
window. A dialog box displays asking if you want to hide the CREG bar. Click Yes to hide it.
To re-display it, click again on the CREG title and click the Yes button to show it.

Purple = positive assignments from the Epitope Analysis Results box

Pink = Tail assignments that are masked by Epitope analysis

Blue = Cw assignments

Green = Bw4 and Bw6 assignments
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
233
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Click any
of these
areas on
the CREG
bar to circle
antigens
in the
specificity
area above.
1. Click a CREG group or antigens to circle the corresponding specificities.
2. Right-click an antigen to move the specificity to the Final Assignments box.
Do the following if you want to use a different CREG table:
1. Click the LCT
home page button, or select Utilities > Antibody Product
Configuration > Set Analysis Configuration.
2. From the Home page, click the Edit link to display the
Analysis Configuration Settings dialog box. (This
dialog box is displayed already if you are accessing it
through the Utilities menu.)
3. Select a table from the CREG drop-down list.
4. Click Save.
Sort by Well Position
This button appears when the histogram is currently sorted by reaction. When clicked, it sorts the
histogram in order of well position, and the button is labeled Refresh.
1. From the analysis window, click the Sort by Well Position button
2. To return to sorting by reaction, click the Refresh button
.
.
Before Sort by well is selected – in order of reaction.
After Sort by well is selected – in order of well position.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
234
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Select Minimum Positive Threshold
You can change the minimum positive threshold using the pull-down menu.

From the analysis window, select a new positive threshold from the Threshold drop-down list, next
to the analysis tools near the top of the window. The sample is re-analyzed according to the new
threshold. The effects of the threshold change is seen in the result boxes.
Setting the Minimum Positive Threshold
Exclude Antigen from Analysis
All antigens entered are excluded from analysis. To enter multiple antigens, use a comma to separate
antigen entries.
1. From the analysis window, click the Excl. Ag.
button
displayed.
. The Exclude Antigen popup box is
Exclude Antigen setting
Type in antigens to exclude and click OK. Valid characters for the Exclude Antigen text box are alphabetic and numeric characters, spaces, commas, backspace characters and the carriage return.
Note:
To also exclude all typing antigens for the associated patient, select the Exclude Patient
Typing check box.
The sample is re-analyzed, and the excluded antigens are listed in the Excluded Antigens field under the
analysis statistics box.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
235
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To include these antigens again, click the Excl. Ag button again, click Clear to remove antigens from the
field, and then click OK to re-analyze with these antigens included.
Include/Exclude Cw
You can choose to include or exclude Cw antigen specificities from analysis.
1. Near the top of the analysis window, select the Cw check box
specificities.
2. Clear the Cw check box
to re-analyze with Cw
to re-analyze without Cw specificities.
Raw Data Table
Positive beads are displayed in red text. Rows highlighted in yellow have normalized values over the
minimum value entered in the Min Value box. Changes made to the normalization formula and
minimum normalized value apply only to the raw data table and not to analysis.
1. From the analysis window, click the Raw Data button in the bottom right of the analysis window
to display raw data table.
2. Click on a header to sort the table by that category.
3. Click
in the upper right corner of the table to close the window and to return to analysis.
Raw Data Table
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
236
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Raw Data Report
For easier navigation, exporting and printing, you can create a report containing raw data information for
the current sample.
1. Once the Raw Data Table is displayed, click the Report button in the bottom right portion of the
Raw Data Table window to display a report of the raw data.
LCT Raw Data Report
Donor PRA
You can display the percentage of PRA from available donors in the system or from selected donor
groups who match the computer-assigned antibodies for the current sample.
Note:
To select a donor group(s), select Utilities > General Settings. To create a donor group,
select Patient Info > Manage Patient, select Donor in the Patient/Donor field, and fill in
the donor group field.
1. For Single Antigen or PRA analysis, click the DPRA
button .
DPRA pop-up message
A pop-up box displays the percentage of matching donor PRA and the total
number of donors that were considered in the calculation.
2. Click OK to close the box.
The percentage and number of donors remains displayed next to the Donor PRA
button.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
237
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Calculated PRA
You can perform Calculated PRA (CPRA) analysis by clicking on the CPRA button, found to the right
of the DPRA button on the lower left panel. Clicking the CPRA button will calculate PRA (UNOS calculator) using unacceptable antigens assigned to the patient record.
To perform Calculated PRA (CPRA) analysis using the unacceptable antigens for the patient,
1. From within the Final Assignment box, select several antigens by highlighting them, then
right-click and choose “Add Unacceptable Antigen.”
2. Click the CPRA button. The percentage score
will appear next to the CPRA button.
Adding Comments to Samples
Sample comments are displayed for the sample’s results in the current analysis session in all analysis,
data look up and reporting functions in HLA Fusion.
1. In the analysis window, type sample comments into the Comments field below the Assignments
area.
Standard comment field
Comment Window is
displayed if you doubleclick in the standard
comments field.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
238
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Comments are only saved when you click Save.
Flagging a Sample for Further Testing
Marking a sample for more testing displays the More Tests check box for the sample’s results in the
current analysis session in all analysis, data look up and reporting functions in HLA Fusion.

In the analysis window, check the More Tests check box
located below the Assignments area.
Printing the Current Analysis Window
The Print Screen button prints the currently displayed analysis window.

From the analysis window, click the Print Screen button
analysis screen.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
on the toolbar to print the current
239
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Previewing and Printing Reports
Preview or Print Reports
To view or print an Antibody Screening Mixed Data report for
the current sample, use the Preview Report button on the
toolbar.

In the analysis window, click the Preview Report button
or Print Report button
to display a list of reports you
can print or preview for the current sample.
Making Final Assignments
Final assignments can be made from either the Tail or Epitope results lists. Once a specificity has been
moved to the Final Assignments area, it is no longer displayed in its initial results box. You can select
more than one specificity in a given results field by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking multiple
specificities.
From the analysis window, do one of the following to make assignments:

Double-click an antigen specificity in the Tail or Epitope Analysis results box to assign the
specified antigen to the Final Assignment field.

Click to highlight the specificity and click the Assign Single button
Assignment field.

Click the Assign All button
to the right of the Tail or Epitope list to move all the current
results on that list to the Final Assignments field.

Right-click on a specificity, or CREG group on the CREG Table to assign it to the Final
Assignments area.
to move it to the Final
Manual Assignments
Manual assignments can be entered in the field below the Final Assignments results field. Enter
multiple manual assignments by leaving a space between each specificity.
1. From the analysis window, type a manual antigen specificity assignment in the field under the Final
Assignment box.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
240
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Click the Assign button
, just above the Manual
Assignment field, to add the assignment to the
Final Assignment results field.
Manual
Assignment
Area
Assigning Negative Sample Values
You can assign a negative value to a sample even if analysis shows some positive results.

From the analysis window, click the Assign -ve button
, located just above the Manual
Assignment field, to assign all samples on the Final Assignment results box a negative value.
Removing Assignments
Specificities can be removed from the Final Assignments results field. You can remove more than
one specificity by holding down the Ctrl
key and clicking each specificity you want to remove.

From the analysis window, click to highlight specificities on the Final Assignment list (hold down
the CTRL key to select more than one), and click the Remove button, located below the Final
Assignments results box.
Saving Assignments
Lab technicians and supervisors can save analysis results for further review and approval. Saved samples
are available for confirmation only by a lab supervisor

From the analysis window, click the Save button
, located in the bottom right corner of the
analysis window to save analysis results for all the specificities currently listed in the Final
Assignments field.
Fusion automatically moves you to the next sample.
For confirmation, a supervisor needs to access the sample for which you saved the assignments. You can
return to the sample any time prior to confirmation if you need to make changes. Click the Reanalyze
button and then the Save
button again.
Confirming Assignments
Lab supervisors can confirm analysis results. When they do so, samples are marked as Confirmed. The
Confirm button is purple when you view a confirmed sample.

From the analysis window, click the Confirm button
, located in the bottom right corner of
the window, to confirm all analysis results that have been saved in the Final Assignments results box.
You automatically move to the next sample to continue confirming results.
When you first return to a confirmed sample, you see that the Confirm button is now shaded purple
to let you know it has been confirmed before.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
241
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Navigator Right-Click Menu Options for LCT Sessions
Analysis options are available through the Navigator—whether you are in the LCT session summary view
or on an analysis screen for a sample. By right-clicking on either a session or a sample in the Navigator
window when either a session summary or analysis window is displayed, you access menu options that
allow you to affect your LCT analysis sessions before or during analysis.
Right-click (Sample-level) options
Right-click (Session-level) options
Reanalyze with New Catalog
Allows the session to by re-analyzed using a new or updated catalog file.
1. Rename the session.
2. Click the drop-down arrow in the New Catalog ID field, and select a new catalog from the list.
3. Click the Analysis button.
The session on which you right-clicked is reanalyzed with the catalog file you just selected.
Reanalyze with a new catalog
Rename the
new session
to avoid
duplicate
session
names.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
242
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Sample-Level Options
The Related Records and Side By Side Analysis menu options are available if you right-click on an
active sample in the Navigator (first activate the sample with a left click):
Related Records
A related record is a record that is associated with the current sample by patient or sample ID.
Note:
This option is also available by using the Related Records toolbar button
.

Select this menu option to load all records related to the current sample into the Sample drop-down
list. Use the sample navigation arrows to display the analysis of each related record one by one.

To go back to viewing the samples in the current sessions, click the <<Summary link at the top of
the window.
Side By Side Analysis
Use this option compare the current sample analysis with one previously conducted.
Note:
This option is also available by using the Side By Side Analysis toolbar button
.
Side-by-Side analysis
Current
Analysis
Previous
Analysis
1. Right-click a sample from the Navigator. A list of available samples is displayed.
2. Select a previous sample analysis from the displayed list to compare to the current one. The two
analysis windows are then displayed in a comparison window. Each window can be resized and
moved by dragging and dropping. Click the Side By Side Analysis toolbar button to cancel the
comparison display.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
243
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Reports
HLA Fusion™ provides different report formats in which to output your analysis data and results. From
the Reports menu you can do the following:

Create, print and export reports for analysis data for all supported products.

Create custom reports for which you determine content type.

Create reports for electronic submission, such as NMDP HML reports.

Store as many as 18 reports in a My Favorites list for convenient access.

Modify the appearance of any report, such as fonts, formatting, and background colors,
(supervisors only).
In addition, the following are a few considerations before you create reports in HLA Fusion:

The report date is in a different font than the other report contents. This is by design to allow the
Crystal Reports date field to be displayed in PDF format in various language and regional settings.

Please verify the reports and the data during the installation and validation process.

All report files are made available to you so that you can arrange and size the fields to meet your
needs.
Note:
To view reports, your computer must have some form of printer driver installed. If you do
not have a printer driver installed, you can download a free copy of PDF Distiller from
Adobe.com, or Microsoft Office Document Image Writer from Microsoft.com. In addition,
you can print and export these reports from the analysis or batch summary window.
Sample IDs, Patient IDs, Well IDs, Alleles, Serology, and so forth are sorted
alphanumerically in reports, just as they are on other HLA Fusion forms and lists.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
244
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Using the Reports Window
The following sections describe how to create, save and print a report containing your analysis data. Here
are the main steps you must take to create a report from this window:
1.
1.
2.
3.
Select a report type.
As needed, select criteria to refine report input, such as date range.
Select the sessions or samples to include in the report.
Select the View Report or the Export Report button
Accessing the Reports Window
Access the Reports window in one of two ways:


On the home page, click Reports
Or click ,
on the Fusion menu bar.
button on the Fusion Explorer.
The Reports window is displayed, with a list of any sessions that fall within the date range (based on
the session date range set in the Find dialog box). If no session are displayed, try modifying the
date range.
Report
types
Shortcuts
Create a Save and To format
to other
reports
Separate Access
Fusion
To close Report up to 18 and create
menu the reports for each different
data
options. window sample reports
export
Set the
order and
sort criteria
for report
columns.
Date range
for
displayed
sessions
Click to
filter
sessions by
selected
criteria
You can
pair a
Catalog ID
and alleles,
(that matc h
alleles in
the allele
pair or
assigned
allele field.)
View,
customize,
export or
email a
report.
Report
title
List of
sessions
Filtered
by report
type and
input
criteria.
Criteria to
refine report
data (filters
the displayed
sessions)
Select a tab
to view either
by session
or sample.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
245
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Select Report Type

Select a report from the report type menu options displayed at the top of the Reports window.
The list of sessions in the right pane of the Reports window is filtered to display only the ones
related to the selected report type.
Report Types
Refine Report Input
If needed, use the left panel of the Reports window, to further filter the sessions you want to include in
your report. There are a number of criteria you can set:
1. Enter a Patient ID, Session or Sample ID
fields, or browse for the information with the
Browse
button.
Click to filter sessions
by selected criteria.
2. Adjust the date range. Use the drop-down
calendars in the Session Date fields to select
a different start and end date.
3. Enter or browse for specific sample or session
characteristics or status (see below).
4. Once you set criteria and click the Find
button on the left panel of the Reports
window, the session list in the right panel of
the window filters accordingly.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
Sample, session
status or other
characteristics
as search criteria
246
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Session/Sample Selection

In the Samples/Sessions list, click the + sign next to any session to expand the display to show its
samples.
View by Sessions
or by Samples
A session with
some, but not all
samples selected
A session with all
samples selected
Sessions
Samples
1. Select the check boxes next to each sample you want to include in a report. Select the check box
next to a session ID to include all of its samples. (Deselect the check box of any sample or session
you do not want to include in the report.)
2. If at least one sample has been selected for a session, the Include cell for that session is
highlighted with grey. If all samples for a session are selected, there is a check box in the Include
In cell.
3. (Optional) To view all the samples available, or to view only the samples you have selected so far,
click the Samples tab and select or deselect the check box for Show selected samples.
4. Alternatively, you can right-click on a session or sample and apply one of the following:
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
247
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

Select All: select all sessions and samples for
inclusion in the report.

Deselect All: deselect all sessions and samples
from inclusion in the report.

Analysis Select: specify the analysis product
report type (LABType, Micro SSP, LABScreen,
etc.)

Category Select: choose the report category—
molecular or antibody.
To create a separate report for each selected sample, select the check box next to 1
Sample per Report.
View, Print or Export Reports

Once you have the report type and all the samples selected, click View Report. The report is
displayed in a separate window, the Report Viewer.
Example of a report viewed in the Report Viewer
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
248
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The Report Viewer contains various toolbar buttons to allow you to export, print and navigate through
your report.
The functionality of these buttons is described in the following table:
Report Viewer Toolbar
Toolbar Button
What it Does
Export Report: Exports reports in one of several available
formats including, Crystal Reports, PDF and Microsoft Word.
Print Report: Sends the current report directly to the printer.
Toggle Group Tree: Opens a tree panel on the left side of
the Report Viewer window which lists all the samples
included in the current report.
Report Page Navigator: If the report has multiple pages,
these buttons allow you to move to the first page, the next
page, the previous page or the last page.
Find Text: Clicking this button opens a text box which allows
you to search and find text throughout the report.
Zoom: Click the down arrow on this button to choose a zoom
setting, view an entire report page, or view by the report
page’s width.
To close the Report Viewer window, click the Close button
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
in upper right corner of the viewer.
249
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Export Report
1. Click the Export Report button
when you want to export a report in one of several
standard formats. The Select Output Directory and Save Type dialog box is displayed.
Exported report destination/file save as type screen
1. Enter a name for the current exported report, or browse for a report file to export.
2. Select a format from the Save as type drop-down list (Excel, Acrobat, Word, or Rich Text
format).
3. Click OK. By default, the file is saved in C:\OLI Fusion\data\report).
Accessing Reports from the My Favorite Menu
The My Favorite menu is a convenient way for you to access and generate the reports you use most. You
can make as many as 18 report types available from the My Favorite drop-down, including custom
reports. Adding to or deleting from the list is easy.
Adding Reports to My Favorite
1. Make sure you have selected the report you want to add to My Favorite (verify that its name is
displayed in the Report Options section of the Reports window).
Add a new report to the My Favorites menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
250
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
2. Select My Favorite > Add to My Favorite.
The current report name is added to your My Favorite menu. When you want to generate this report,
just click on its name from the bottom portion of the My Favorite menu.
Saved reports are
listed below this line
and can be accessed
at any time.
Removing Reports from My Favorite
1. Select My Favorite, and select the report you want to remove from the list of reports at the
bottom of the menu. The My Favorite menu closes.
2. Select My Favorite > Remove from My Favorite.
The report you selected in step 1 is no longer displayed at the bottom of the My Favorite menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
251
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Reports Tools
Customizing Report Appearance
Note:
You must be a supervisor-level user in HLA Fusion and have Crystal Report Designer
software installed on your computer to use this feature.
This feature allows you to format the appearance of HLA Fusion reports to meet your specific needs. For
example, you can change fonts, size and color as well as the location of text and data fields on the report.

HLA Fusion automatically launches the report designer if it is installed in the default directory
(C:\Program Files (x86)\SAP BusinessObjects\SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
4.0\win32_x86\crw32.exe).

Use Notepad to open the OneLambda.Fusion.Interface.exe configuration file, located in C:\Program
Files (x86)\One Lambda\HLA Fusion 4.0. Make sure that the Crystal Reports Designer path
name is entered on the following line of this file (see figure below):
<add key=”ReportDesigner” value=”C:\Program Files (x86)\SAP BusinessObjects\SAP
BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0\win32_x86\crw32.exe” />
Editing OneLambda.Fusion.Interface.exe
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
252
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
 Please note that all the report files used in HLA Fusion are installed in the directory C:\OLI
Fusion\rpt\IVD 4.0, and they all have the extension of .rpt. These files can be moved anywhere
for central access, but to do so, you must update the location (path) in the
OneLambda.Fusion.Interface.exe file.
 When you open a report to customize it, a backup copy is automatically created with the
timestamp as the suffix of the report name. This allows you to retrieve the original report
format, if needed.
1. Select Reports > Tools > Customize Report.
Use the Crystal Report Designer tools to modify the appearance of your report.
Once you have made changes to the report format, save it. Make sure you do not change the name of the
report file. Next time you run this report in HLA Fusion, the report will have the appearance you last
saved in Crystal Report Designer.
Creating Custom Data Export Templates
1. Select Tools > Setup Export to customize report data export by setting up templates that
determine the type of report data (session, sample, patient, results, etc.) is exported when you
select that template.
The Export Data Setup dialog box is displayed, allowing you to select
the name of the export template, the fields to be included, and the field
order you want for the template. Select check boxes on the left to select
category and fields. On the right side of the dialog box, drag and drop
the fields, or hold CTRL and press the Up/Down arrow keys to change
the order.
Export Data Setup screen
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
253
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
2. When you are done, click the Save button.
The new template is added to available export templates from the Tools > Export Data menu.
Export Data – Select template
3. When you are ready to export data, first select all the sessions you want to include from the
available list. Then, select Tools > Export Data, and select one of the templates. The Export
Data dialog box is displayed.
Export Data – file save location
4. Select the format for the exported data—XML, CSV or Text. The exported data file is saved by
default in C:\OLI Fusion\data\export.
Creating Custom Reports
Certain report types allow you to customize the types of fields to include.
Note:
For Molecular Custom or Antibody Custom reports, you must make sure the Free 3 of 9
Extended font is installed on your computer—otherwise, the barcode is not recognized. If
needed, you can download this font for free at http://www.free-barcode-font.com/.
1. To create a custom report, select a report type containing the word “Custom” in its name, (e.g.,
Molecular Custom, under the Generic Typing report type menu).
2. Click the Setup button in the Report Option section of the window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
254
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Molecular Custom report setup screen
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Antibody Custom report setup screen
The Custom Report Setup window is displayed, allowing you to customize report content by
selecting from various categories and fields.
Custom Molecular and Antibody Report Setup
1. Enter a name or select one from the drop-down list.
2. Select the check box next to each field you want to include in this report.
Note:
To include all related fields, you can click the Check All button to select all the fields in
the category.
3. Click the Save
button to save the custom report setup you have just selected.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
255
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Sample Summary
The Sample Summary feature lists multiple samples and their typing results.

Select samples using the Reports window.

Click the Sample Summary button. The Sample Summary window is displayed; it contains
two tabs— Molecular and Antibody.
Sample Summary window
Molecular Typing Sample Summary
Selected antigen typing records are displayed on the Molecular tab of the Sample Summary screen. You
can view typing information in a condensed format, as well as display more details for any sample.
1. Select samples using the Reports window.
2. Click the Sample Summary button. The default tab is
Molecular.
3. Select an option from the Select Type of Data to Display drop-down list.
Reports – Sample Summary Screen
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
256
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The window displayed depends on the option selected.

Click the Export

Click the DNA
4. Click the Close button
Reports window.
button to export the displayed data as an Excel file.
button to export molecular specificities as an Excel file.
in the upper right corner of the window to close and return to the
Antibody Screening Sample Summary
Any selected antibody screening records are displayed on the Antibody tab of the Sample Summary
screen. You can view screening information in a condensed format, as well as display more details for
any sample.
1. Select samples using the Reports window.
2. Click the Sample Summary
button.
3. Click the Antibody tab.
Reports – Sample Summary Screen

Click the Export

Click the DNA button to export molecular specificities as an Excel file.
4. Click the Close button
window.
button to export the displayed data as an Excel file.
in the upper-right of the window to close and return to the Reports
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
257
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
View Records
The View Records feature presents typing results and analysis details for each sample selected. Sample
information is shown for one sample at a time. From the View Records menu, you can view screening and
typing records individually.
1. Select data records using the Reports window.
Reports – View Records Screen
2. Click the View Records
3. Use the arrow buttons
button.
to navigate through samples.
4. Click the View Analysis button
to open the analysis window for the current sample.
The analysis window can be resized.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
258
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Reports – View Records Screen
5. Click the Close
button to close the window and return to the Reports window.
Patient Info
You can view patient records associated with selected samples by clicking on the Patient Info tab.
Patient information can also be viewed by patient ID using the Patient look up function of the Patient
Management menu. From the Patient Info menu, you can view Patient/Donor records.
To view patient information, you must select a sample(s). You can view, but not edit the displayed
information.
1. Select sessions or samples from the Reports window that have an associated Patient/Donor ID.
2. Click the Patient Info button
.
The Patient/Donor information screen is displayed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
259
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Patient Information Screen
3. Click the Test Info tab to see that information for the current patient/donor. If more than one
information card is displayed, use the arrow buttons to navigate through the patient records.
4. Click the Close button
in the upper right corner to close and return to the Reports window.
Audit Trail Report
You can view and print a report of user activity for the current database. This data is only available if you
have done the following:

Set up and connected to an audit trail database (see the HLA Fusion Database Utility User
Manual).

Enabled Audit Logging from the HLA Fusion default home page.
Once you have completed the above, and wish to view audit log data, take the following steps:
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
260
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Access the Reports window in one of two ways:

From the home page, click Create Reports.

From the Fusion main menu options, select Reports.
Select Miscellaneous > Audit Trail Log. The Audit Trail Log dialog box displays.
Audit Trail Log Screen

Use the drop-down arrow to select the User for whom you want to see database actions.

Select the date range and options you want the report to include.
Click List
to see the report. If you want to export the audit trail report to Excel, click Export
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
.
261
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Report Types
There are several report types available. Although most report types are listed in this section, please note
that because new reports are sometimes added between updates to this user manual, you may see more
reports listed in the software.
Patient - (all patients in the Fusion database)

Patient Summary - (summary of typing and antibody testing results associated with a patient)

Patient Typing for Batch - (typing summary report over different loci for a set of samples,
based on a selected session)

Patient Custom - (you select the type of patient data to include for the selected samples)
Generic Typing - (typing data from analyzed LABType and MicroSSP samples)

Molecular Custom - (you select the type of molecular data to include for a set of samples)

Custom Typing Results by Sample - (you select the type of molecular data to include for selected samples)

Consensys Custom Report

Allele Summary - (typing report of possible allele pairs and assigned allele code results for a
set of samples)

Allele Code - (typing report of possible allele codes and assigned allele code results for a set of
samples)

Molecular Typing Summary - (typing report of the possible allele code, assigned allele code,
assigned allele pairs, assigned serology, and other assignments for a set of samples)

Combined Sample – Generic Typing
LABType - (data from analyzed LABType samples)

Panel Summary - (report of the final NMDP coded assignment and the positive probes for a
set of sample in a session)

QC Overview - (summary of samples with low bead count, low positive control, pre-analysis
global cutoff changes, as well as sample specific changes for a session of samples)

Combined Panel Summary (NMDP) - (spreadsheet of final NMDP code assignments for single or multiple sessions)

Combined Sample - LABType
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
262
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
MicroSSP - (data from analyzed Micro SSP samples)

SSP Report - (detailed typing report for Micro SSP™ tests that may be customized)

Custom SSP Report
Generic Antibody - (antibody data from analyzed LABScreen, FlowPRA, LAT or LCT samples)

Antibody Custom - (User may customize a report for antibody data for a set of samples)

Antibody Screening/ID - (antibody data report that is fixed in format)

Antibody Screening Results - (summary table for a selected set of samples which includes the
overall final results made, %PRA, other assignments, and comments)
LABScreen - (data from analyzed LABScreen samples)

LSM Detail (detailed test information for antibody mixed analysis records)

LSM Summary (overall test results for antibody mixed analysis records)

LSM Overview (overall tests results for antibody mixed analysis records including total number of positive, negative and undetermined results. User may select the highest or lowest bead
ratio found for each sample)

Product Comparison
LAT - (data from analyzed LAT samples)

LAT Custom

LAT-Mixed Raw Data (results of multiple samples on an LAT-Mixed analysis tray, including a
tray layout of the original raw data input and test results)

LAT-Mixed (results of a single sample on an LAT-Mixed analysis tray, including a tray layout
of the original raw data input and test results)

LAT-Specificity Raw Data (Raw data results for LAT specificity or HD trays, including a tray
layout of the original raw data input and test results)

LAT Specificity (complete specificity report for LAT specificity and HD trays, including overall, tail, epitope, manual tail assignments, and test details)
LCT - (data from analyzed LCT samples)

LCT Custom

LCT Specificity (test details of a single sample on an LCT analysis tray)
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
263
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
FlowPRA - (data from analyzed FlowPRA samples)

Flow PRA Custom

Flow PRA Specificity (test details of a single sample on a FlowPRA® analysis tray)
Specialty - (reports created for specialized purpose)

Export Date

User Reports (the following is a partial list of such reports)

Antibody Reaction - (summary table of computer specificity assignments based on reaction
scores)

SCORE - (export report used by SCORE software)

LABType - (export report covering LABType results)

LABScreen - (export report covering LABScreen results)

Reaction Assignment Report - (export report including sample ID and reaction string)

NMDP Code Report
The following specialty reports are customized for specific users:

LBSW

HML V0.2

HML V0.3

LC

NBS

Thai Export

UMC-Utrecht Report

BML

ABMDR

CMDP
Statistical - (statistical or aggregate data for trending, measurement, monitoring, etc.)

Allele Group Frequency (displays the frequency of allele groups based on the first two digits of
an allele assignment for selected sessions or the database)
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
264
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual

Allele Group Frequency Extended - (displays the frequency of allele groups based on NMDP
code results or allelic level assignment for selected sessions or the database)

Cutoff Adjustment Summary (summary of all cutoff changes made for selected sessions or
based on a specific catalog file)
Miscellaneous - (reports that do not fall into one of the above categories)

Database Information (describes the usage of the current database)

Batch Data File Summary (a log of the status of all the sessions run in the system)

Serological Equivalent (list of alleles and their serological equivalent definitions)

NMDP Code (list of NMDP codes and their allele definition)

Typing Query (database search report that lists the samples found for a selected allele)

Audit Trail Log (a log with all specified activity for a selected users in the current Fusion database)
My Favorite - (any of the above reports saved in a favorites list)

Reports listed depend on what you have stored under this menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
265
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Data Management
When you select the Data menu item, a window is displayed that allows you to manage session files, as
well as create log files of session data. From this menu, you can delete, archive, activate, and move
sessions to a different database. You can also map the alleles in a session to the new nomenclature
format.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
266
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Session Management
To manage your data at the session level, use the Data option from the HLA Fusion main menu. When
you select the Data main menu, the Manage Data window is displayed.
Select patient records
to archive or delete.
Sort/Select display options
View
S e ssi o n
data and
add
commen ts.
Archive
the
selected
session.
Set
Search
Criteria
Copy patient
data to
another
datab ase
Manage Session Data Window

When you click Translate Alleles
, all final allele pairs and code for
the selected sessions are converted to the
new nomenclature format and stored in the
database.

When you click Move Sessions
,
you can select another Fusion database to
which the selected sessions are moved.
Mo v e
sessions
to a
different
datab ase.
Translate
session
alleles
to the
new format
Prints details
about which
tests were
done , by
whom, etc.
Restore an
archived
session and
make it
availab le
for use.
Delete
selected
r e cor d
Exit the
Manage
Data
window.
HLA Fusion allows you the capability to
create log files of your selected analysis
sessions, which you can then print or
archive.
1. Provide all necessary session input information by using the drop-down menus and search
buttons on the left side of the Data window.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
267
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Once a session is selected, its information is displayed on the right side of the window, the Session Info
pane, where you can add information.
2. Once you have all information you want to include in the log, click Save.
Once you have displayed the session log you want, use the Print Session Log, Archive, Active and
Delete buttons at the bottom of the window to manage the log.
Note:
Samples can also be deleted individually, without the need to delete an entire session.
The only exception are LABType or Micro SSP samples that have been combined.
HLA Fusion allows you to move patient records.
1. Select Patient ID as the Sorted Select Level. The Select Patient window is displayed.
2. Select one or more patients.
The following window displays:
3. Select browse (...) in the Target Database field to select the database to which you want to
move the selected patient records.
4. Once you have selected the target database, click Send to Target Database.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
268
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Sample Management
In HLA Fusion, sample lists are an easy way to input a large list of sample IDs and other sample
information into the database for use in analysis sessions. Sample lists may be in .xls, CSV or .txt file
format. From the Sample List Import menu, you can import sample lists or edit sample lists prior to
importation.
Note:
Please verify all data you import as HLA Fusion performs minimal data validation upon
import.
Importing Sample Lists
Sample lists are an easy way to input an extended list of sample ID’s and other sample information into
the database for use in analysis sessions.
1. From the Main Menu, select Sample > Import Sample List.
Import Sample List Screen
The Import Sample List window displays.
2. Click the Search Sample List button; browse for the sample list to be imported; and click
Open.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
269
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
3. Type a name in the List ID field, and, if necessary, select a Lab code or Contact ID from the
drop-down list.
4. Confirm sample information, and edit if needed.
5. Click to clear the check boxes of any samples you do not want to import.
6. Click Import List to import the selected sample lists.
7. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Information Formats for Sample Lists
The information inside a sample list you import in to HLA Fusion must be in one of the following
formats.
New packing list format
This file gives the fields (in this order):
ShipmentLoc(1 – 13),SampleIDName(0198-0398-0),SampleType(AB, DR or AB/DR),
TurnaroundTime(14, 21 or 14AB/21DR),DCN (3 digit).
Example line:
1 - 13,0198-0398-0,AB/DR,14AB/21DR,074
Pack list: Old Standard ‘X’ samples
This file gives the fields (in this order):
ShipmentLoc,SampleIDName,SampleType (1, 2, 3..., and an 'X' for AB/DR samples),DCN
Example line:
1 - 12,0287-7867-8,X,074
Old packing list format, '11' for AB/DR samples
This file lists (in this order):
ShipmentLoc, SampleIDName, SampleType (1, 2, 3..., and an '11' for AB/DR samples),
DCN
Example line:
1 - 15,0287-0779-2,11,074
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
270
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Comma-Delimited Format
Each field is separated by commas. The use of quotes around a field is optional, and is required only if the
contents of the field use a comma, which could confuse field separation. This file lists (in this order):
ShipmentLoc, SampleIDName, SampleType (AB, DR or AB/DR), TurnaroundTime (14, 21 or
14AB/21DR), DCN
Example line:
"1","12","0287-7867-8","AB/DR","14AB/21DR","074"
Tab-Delimited Format
Each field is separated by a tab. This file lists (in this order):
ShipmentLoc, SampleIDName, SampleType (AB, DR or AB/DR), TurnaroundTime (14, 21 or
14AB/21DR), DCN
Example line:
1
12
0287-7867-8
AB/DR
14AB/21DR
074
SDF Format
Each field is separated by commas. This file lists (in this order):
BoxSlot, DonarID, SampleType (AB, DR or AB/DR), TurnaroundTime (14, 21 or 14AB/21DR),
DonarCenter
Example line:
1120287-7867-8AB,DR14,21074
Local/Sample/Patient ID Only
This file is a Microsoft Excel file. This file lists (in this order):
Row 1:
Column
Column
Column
Column
Example:
Column Title “Local” and “Sample” and “Patient”
A: LocalID
B: SampleIDName (required)
C: PatientIDName
D: Date
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
271
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Viewing and Editing Sample Information
Sample information can be edited, but associated patient IDs cannot—only new patient IDs can be added.
1. From the Main Menu, select Sample > Manage Sample Info.
Manage Sample screen
2. Use the filters to find samples, and click View Sample.
Note:
Wildcards can be used in the Sample ID field to widen the results.
3. Edit sample information.
Note:
You can rename a sample by modifying the name in the Sample ID field. Sample IDs are
listed alphanumerically, with all IDs beginning with numbers listed first.
4. Click Save to save. Or, click Delete to delete the sample.
5. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Note:
You are not allowed to delete a sample that is part of a session that has already been
analyzed.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
272
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Test Lists
A Test List is a list of Sample IDs that can be used repeatedly to automatically write the sample IDs into a
session analysis that can be read by Luminex®. It is a useful tool when you have a group of samples to be
run on multiple tests.
From the Test List menu you can:

Create new Test Lists

View and edit existing Test Lists

Delete Test Lists

Export Test Lists to a .txt file
Creating New Test Lists
Test Lists must be created in the order in which the samples are to be analyzed.
1. From the Main Menu, select Samples > Manage Test List.
Manage Test List Screen
2. Type in a name for the new test list, and click Continue>>.
3. Search for samples to add to the test list using the search fields, and click Apply to view search
results.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
273
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
4. Highlight samples, and click Add>>
5. Click Save
6. Click Close
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
to add them to the test list.
to save the new test list.
to return to the Main Menu.
Viewing and Editing Existing Test Lists
Test Lists can be viewed or edited at any time.
1. From the Main Menu, select Manage Samples > Manage Test List.
2. Use the drop-down list to select a test list, and click Continue>>.
3. Click Delete List to permanently delete the selected test list.
4. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Deleting Existing Test Lists
Deleting a test list removes the list from the database, but the sample IDs are not removed or changed in
the database.
1. From the Main Menu, select Manage Samples > Manage Test List.
2. Use the pull-down menu to select a test list, and click Continue>>.
3. Add, remove or move samples as desired.
4. Click Save to save the new test list.
5. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Exporting Test Lists
Test lists can be exported for use outside of HLA Fusion only as a .txt files.
1. From the Main Menu, select Manage Samples > Manage Test List.
2. Use the pull-down menu to select a test list, and click Continue>>.
3. Click Export to export test list details to a .txt file.
4. If prompted to save the test list before export, click Yes to save and continue.
5. Select a location to save the test list and enter a file name for it.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
274
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
6. Click Save.
7. When prompted to create a Luminex Patient List input, click No.
8. Click Close to close and return to the Main Menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
275
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Luminex Lists
HLA Fusion can create a Luminex List from a new or existing test list. You can use this list to quickly add
information, such as sample ID, before you create a Luminex CSV output file. From the Create/Edit
Test List window you can create a Luminex list.
Creating Luminex Lists
Luminex List files can be edited after they are exported, but changes are not reflected in the test list from
which they were created.
1. From the Main Menu, select Samples > Manage Test List.
2. Use the pull-down menu to select a test list, and click Continue>>.
3. Click Export to export.
4. Select a location to save the test list to and enter a file name, then click Save.
5. When prompted to create Luminex List input, click Yes.
6. Click OK on the confirmation message to return to the Test List window.
7. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Create Sample Worklists
Sample Work list functionality
in HLA Fusion software gives
you the flexibility to assign
various tests to selected
samples. This information is
used in designing plates for
Luminex processing.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
276
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. Select Sample > Create Sample Work list from the HLA Fusion main menu.
Do one of the following to search for samples:
a. Click the Search by sample tab, use the search criteria to specify the samples that you
would like to assign tests to, and click Search.
b. Click the Search by the test list tab and use the search criteria to specify the test lists that
you would like to assign tests to, and click Search.
2. Select one sample, or select multiple samples (by holding and dragging the mouse). The selected
samples are highlighted.
3. Now assign one or more tests by selecting the check boxes for the tests you want to run on the
samples (listed under LABScreen/LABType/C1q Tests).
4. Once you are done assigning tests to all the selected samples, click Save to save the work list.
5. Click close at any time to exit the sample worklist window.
Create Plate Design
Plate Designer functionality in HLA Fusion software gives you the flexibility to organize and plan your
samples in a plate format that is ready for processing through the Luminex system. You must first create
a sample work list.
1. Select Sample > Create Plate Design from the main HLA Fusion menu.
2. Enter a name for a new plate, or select an existing plate name from the Plate Name drop-down
list to edit a plate.
3. Select LABScreen, LABType or C1q from the Assay type drop-down list.
4. Do one of the following to search for samples:

Click the Search by sample tab and use the search criteria to specify the samples that you
would like to assign to the plate wells, and click Search
.

Click the Search by test list tab and use the search criteria to specify the test lists that you
would like to assign to the plate wells, and click Search
.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
277
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand

HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Click the External File tab and use the file import window to load external files containing
samples in predefined file formats. Assign or reassign these tests to the samples in the plate.
The Luminex patient list and sample lists in .CSV format (Swisslab file format) are examples of
predefined external file formats.
Please see the example figures below:
Create a plate design – Search by Sample
Create a plate design – Search by Test List
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
278
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
279
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
5. Choose the fill direction for the plate design. You can select vertical or horizontal direction.
6. Select one sample or several (by holding and dragging the mouse), and use the right arrow button
> to assign these selected samples to a well in the plate. In the case of LABScreen assay the
Secondary antibody IgG shall be assigned to each well of the plate design by default. Repeat this
procedure until you have completed your plate design. To remove a sample from the plate, select
the well or hold ctrl and click to select multiple wells that contain samples, then click X.
Assigning Samples to wells in a new Plate
7. Click Report button if you want to view and print a
report of your plate design information including
Well Position, Sample name, Patient ID and Test
name. You can choose from two types of report
formats: List View, Layout View.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
280
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
8. Click on the Plate detail tab to view the plate design detail. You can also view the test
assignment information and secondary antibody information.
9. Click on the secondary antibody tab (rightmost tab within Plate Designer) to change the
secondary antibody only in the case of the LABScreen assay type selection:
10. Click Save to save your plate design.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
281
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
11. Click Export to … (version of Luminex) to export a plate design so that it can be opened and
used from the selected Luminex software.
a. Click the Change Selection button (above) to select the Luminex software and target
database. Select the available luminex version where you want to export the plate design.
Select the database and save the changes by clicking on Save.
b. Click the Batch naming… button (left corner above) to configure automatic batch-naming.
A new data entry screen will appear (shown below). Enter the session name and choose the
date format, seperator, and batch naming format. Click on Save then close:
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
282
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
You can see the batch name information in the batch name column. Click on Refresh to
update the template list from the luminex database. You may select the template from the
Template column, and edit a batch name in the Batch name column.
12. From the Plate Designer screen, click on Delete Plate to delete the plate design.
13. From the Plate Designer screen, Click on Close to close the plate designer without saving the
plate.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
283
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Patient Information
HLA Fusion™ can store patient information and associate sample IDs with patients and donors. You can
store all typing and screening information in one location for each patient.
Note:
Please verify all data you import. HLA Fusion performs minimal data validation during
import operations.
Importing Patient/Donor Lists
After creating a Patient/Donor List, you can import the information into HLA Fusion.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Import Patient List.
The Patient Import window displays:
Import Patient Window
2. Select the check box in the Import column for each patient you want to import.
3. Click the Import button to import checked patients.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
284
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
4. Click Close to return to the main menu.
Note:
The HLA Fusion system checks the patient/donor lists you attempt to import to verify that
all characters contained in the data are supported by Fusion. If your list contains
unsupported characters, a warning message is displayed and the list is not imported.
Newly imported patient records display alleles in the new nomenclature format. Existing
patient records display alleles with the existing allele format.
Managing Patient/Donor Records
The Patient/Donor Management menu allows you to manage one record at a time.
From the Patient/Donor Management menu you can:

Add new patient/donor records

Search existing patient/donor records

Edit patient/donor records

Associate patient/donor IDs with sample IDs

Associate patient and donor records

Assign a donor to the Donor PRA

Print, export and archive patient records
Adding New Patient/Donor Records
You can add patient information using the Patient/Donor Information menu. This is the best option for
adding a small number of patient records.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
285
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Steps to Add New Patient/Donor Records:
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
Click to display a list of patients/donors in the Fusion database
which you can search through by using numerous criteria.
After selecting
a patient or
donor, place
a check mark
here to edit
the information
fields.
Tools to manage patient
and donor information.
Converts assigned allele code and
pairs to the new nomenclature
format and stores this information
in the Fusion database.
2. Enter an ID in the Patient/Donor field. The ID can be alphanumeric (contain letters and/or
number),or click Search and select a patient/donor from the list.
3. Enter patient/donor information. Fields with an asterisk (*) are required.
4. Click Add New to save the data and add the patient/donor information to the Fusion database.
5. Click Close to close and return to the main menu.
Lookup Patient/Donor Records
This option allows you to browse through records or search for specific ones.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
2. Enter a patient/donor ID and click Retrieve to display patient information. Or, click Search to
browse patient records and lookup by name, patient ID, whether it is active or archived, etc.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
286
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
3. Highlight a patient record and click OK to display.
Editing Patient/Donor Records
Note:
You must be a Supervisor in order to edit a patient/donor record.
All patient/donor information, (except patient/donor ID) can be edited.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
2. Select a patient/donor record.
3. Select the check box next to Edit Mode. There is the same, Edit Mode check box on both tabbed
forms.
4. Edit patient/donor information on one or both tabbed forms. Fields marked with an asterisk (*)
are required.
5. Click Save to save your changes.
6. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
287
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Associating a Patient/Donor ID with Sample IDs
A Sample ID cannot be associated with more than one patient or donor record, but a patient or donor
record can have more than one sample ID associated with it.
From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
1. Select the HLA Tests Tab.
Patient/Donor Information Screen – HLA Tests Tab
2. Click the Associate Sample IDs button.
3. In the Patient/Donor Sample Association window, highlight a sample ID and click> to add
it to the Patient/Donor Sample List. (Click < to remove a highlighted sample ID from the
list.)
4. Click Save to save the data.
5. Click OK to return to the patient record.
6. Click Close to return to the main menu.
Translating Associated Patient/Donor Results to New Allele Code
Patient or Donor results can be translated to update the allele code names to the new NMDP allele code
format.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
288
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The new format will affect allele code and allele pairs assigned to the selected patient/donor, and will be
stored in the Fusion database in the new format.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
2. Select a patient/donor record.
3. Click Translate Alleles.
4. Click Save to save data.
5. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Associating Patient and Donor Records
A Patient ID can be associated with more than one donor record, and a donor ID can have more than one
patient record associated with it.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
2. Select a patient/donor record.
3. Click the Test Info tab.
4. Click the Associate Donor IDs button.
5. In the Patient/Donor Sample Association window, highlight a Donor ID and click>to add
it to the Patient/Donor Sample List. (Click < to remove a highlighted Donor ID from the
list.)
6. Click Save to save data.
7. Click OK to return to patient record.
8. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Associating a Donor with Donor PRA Results
A Donor ID can be included in the calculation for Donor PRA percentage for the antigen products.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
2. Select a donor, or create a new one.
3. Make sure the Patient/Donor filed is set to Donor.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
289
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
4. Select the Include in Donor PRA check box:
Printing Patient/Donor Records
HLA Fusion prints both Record Management tabs regardless of which tab is currently being viewed.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
2. Select a patient/donor record.
3. Click Print to print.
4. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Exporting Patient/Donor Records
Patient/donor records can be exported individually to a CSV file. The file has the same format as a
Patient List.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
290
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
2. Select a patient/donor record.
3. Click Export to export.
4. Select a location to save the CSV file to and enter a file name.
5. Click Save.
6. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Archiving Patient/Donor Records
Archived patient/donor records are not available for reporting or associating. You can still view archived
records and reactivate them by clearing the archive check box.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info> Manage Patient.
2. Click the General Info tab.
3. Select a patient/donor record.
4. From the Patient/Donor List window, select Archive from the drop-down Active/Archive
list.
5. Click Save to save.
6. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
Deleting Patient/Donor Records
Patient/donor records can be deleted through the Manage Patient menu option.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
2. Click the General Info tab.
3. Select a patient/donor record.
4. Click Delete to delete the patient/donor record from the Fusion database.
5. Click Save.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
291
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Creating Patient/Donor Lists
The following is an example of a patient list that can be created and the guidelines for doing so. The
patient list must be formatted for import via a program like Excel or Notepad and saved as a Windows
compatible CSV file.
The first field/section must contain the names of the patient list fields, each separated by commas.
Note:
Creating a new patient list can be made easier by first exporting an existing list into CSV
format, and using the fields in that to build your new list.
Patient List Field Names and Format
PatientIDName,CategoryGrp,FamilyID,FirstName,MiddleName,LastName,Ssn,Dob,Gender,Ethni
city,Address,City,State,Region,Country,ZipCode,Email,Phone,WkPhone,Cellular,Fax,Emplo
yer,SpouseName,SpouseBloodType,EmergencyContact,EmrgncyTel,DCN,HospitalName,Division,
BloodType,Disease,RhBloodType,PatientDonorFlg,Associated SampleIDs,Associated
DonorIDs,HLA1_A,HLA2_A,HLA1_B,HLA2_B,HLA1_BW,HLA2_BW,HLA1_C,HLA2_C,HLA1_DRB1,HLA2_DRB
1,HLA1_DRB3,HLA2_DRB3,HLA1_DRB4,HLA2_DRB4,HLA1_DRB5,HLA2_DRB5,HLA1_DQB1,HLA2_DQB1,HLA
1_DQA1,HLA2_DQA1,HLA1_DPB1,HLA2_DPB1,HLA3,HLA1_DRB4,HLA2_DRB4,HLA1_DRB5,HLA2_DRB5,HLA
1_DQB1,HLA2_DQB1,HLA1_DQA1,HLA2_DQA1,HLA1_DPB1,HLA2_DPB1,HLA1_DPA1,HLA2_DPA1,HLA1_MIC
A,HLA2_MICA,HLA1_MICB,HLA2_MICB,HLA_KIR,ClassI_AbSpec,ClassII_AbSpec,MIC_AbSpec,Unacc
eptableAntigens,AcceptableAntigens,Notes,SHLA1_A,SHLA2_A,SHLA1_B,SHLA2_B,SHLA1_Cw,SHL
A2_Cw,SHLA1_DR,SHLA2_DR,SHLA1_DR345,SHLA2_DR345,SHLA1_DQ,SHLA2_DQ,SHLA1_DP,SHLA2_DP,D
onorType,IncludeInDonorPRA
Subsequent lines must list the actual patient information, alphanumerically, (can be letters and/or
numbers) separated by commas. If there is no information for the patient in a particular field, that field
still requires a comma as a placeholder.
Note:
For all manual serology entries, the locus must precede the value. For example, for an A
locus of value 23, you must enter A23.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
292
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Example Patient/Donor List
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
293
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Calculated PRA
You can calculate the PRA (using the UNOS calculator method) within the Patient Information
screen.
1. From the Main Menu, select Patient Info > Manage Patient.
2. Click the General Info tab. The patient/donor information screen appears.
3. Select a patient/donor record, then click the HLA Tests tab.
4. Observe the previously assigned Unacceptable Antigens list near the bottom left of the screen. If
you have not already conducted analysis previously and assigned Unacceptable Antigens to this
patient, you will have to enter values manually here.
5. Click the CPRA button near the middle right hand side of the screen. The Unacceptable Antigens
list is now used to calculate CPRA percentage score, which is displayed next to the CPRA button:
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
294
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
If the “Show UNOS Web Calculator” checkbox is marked, the CPRA Web Calculator result window appears, hosted by an external website:
The blue refresh button updates the score to account for recent changes without requiring reentry of data into the calculator.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
295
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Patient Antibody Tracking
You can track antibody strength for each patient over a period of time. The information tracked is taken
from the typing data stored in their Patient/Donor Info card and the antibody data in their analysis
samples (LABScreen Single Antigen and LABScreen Singles) for the specified date range. Take the
following steps to display graphs and data that track a patient’s antibody data.
Make sure you have patient and donor information entered into HLA Fusion. If not, you can import it
from a patient list and/or manually enter the data on the Test Info tab of the Patient/Donor Info card.
Patient and donor records must be associated.
11. Select Patient Info >Ab Tracking.
The Patient Antibody Tracking window is displayed.
Clicking the Save button here saves any
samples listed in this area for future analysis
as samples within the chosen date range.
Patient Antibody Tracking window
2. Click the drop down arrow next to the Patient ID field to select from a list of patients stored in
your Fusion database. Or click Search and search by Patient ID, First or Last name, etc.
3. The Molecular and Serological Typing fields are automatically filled with available data for the
specified patient.
4. Select the start and end date range from which you want to view sample antigen data for this
patient (click the drop down arrows in the date fields to display a calendar).
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
296
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
5. You can select Secondary Ab or enter one of your own. This is a way to filter samples and it
means that samples you want to bring up must have this secondary Ab. Otherwise, they will not
be available when Find is clicked.

(Optional) You can display the percentage of PRA from available donors in the system or
from selected donor groups who match the computer-assigned antibodies for the current
sample.
6. Click the Donor PRA button to bring up the following dialog box from which you can select
donor groups or All Donors.
The Donor PRA calculation is displayed next to the Donor PRA button.
Donor Group Selection
7. Click the Find button to display a list of samples for this patient that are within the specified
date range.
Find Patient List
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
297
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
Note:
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
To add final assignments to a sample, double-click in the Final Assignment column for the
sample to display the analysis window and add the assignment. Also, only samples with a
date can be included in this tracking. If the Sample Date column is empty for a sample,
click on the empty Sample Date cell and use the pull-down date-finder to add a date.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
298
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
8. Select the check box in the Include column for the sample(s) you want to include in the Ab
tracking graphs and data. The graphs are displayed. (To display a specific type of graph, click on
the associated tab). Select the check box for the antigen(s) you want to include in the tracking.
Include Antigen List
9. Select the formula to use for the graphs by clicking the drop down arrow in the Formula field,
(Default versus Raw). The formula can also be changed after the graphs are displayed if you
want to compare the tracking with different formulas.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
299
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
You can double-click on a graph to expand it, and there are right-click options available from each
graph (see graphic above). You can also use the expand/contract buttons
to expand the graphs.
in the upper right corners

(Optional) You can add donor data, if desired, by using the drop-down arrow next to the Donor
ID field to select from a list of donors associated with the selected patient. You can also create a
new donor on the fly by typing a unique name into the Donor ID field and filling in the molecular
and sero typing.

(Optional) Enter a numeric value in the User-defined cutoff field. If you want to track the
antibody signal strength with or without the cutoff applied, select or deselect the check box next
to User-defined cutoff.

(Optional) Select the check box next to Track DSA to track donor specific antigens. If this is
selected and there are donor specific antigens that are not tested with OLI product kits, these are
listed.
Donor ID drop-down list.
Select to
include
Class II
tracking.
Select to track
donor-specific
antigens.
List antigens
not tested
with OLI
test kits.
Donor Antibody Information

(Optional) Select the DQA/DPA check box to include these in Class II tracking.

(Optional) Manually enter the donor typing in the Sero Typing field.
10. Click the Data Table button to display a raw data table CSV file with the patient antigen signal
over a period of time. The table can be printed or exported.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
300
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Profile Management
HLA Fusion™ tracks all changes to analysis data made by users and allows added data security with a
two level analysis result confirmation (Save and Confirm). HLA Fusion also stores general laboratory
information to be used on reports including multiple contract lab codes.
User Management
From the Profile main menu you can:

Add new users

Edit existing user profiles

Change passwords

Reset passwords

Archive users
HLA Fusion uses two user levels for added security and control of typing and screening results.
Supervisor can...
Lab Technician can...
Modify all product configuration settings
Modify all product configuration settings—except to
enable Auto Accept All and Computer Generated
Serology for LABType and Micro SSP products
Save and Confirm analysis results
Analyze data and save analysis results
Update reference files, such as catalogs
and NMDP codes
(Only if authorized by the supervisor) - Update reference
files, such as catalogs and NMDP codes
Archive catalogs
Archive catalogs
Modify and delete session and sample data
(Only if authorized by the supervisor) - Modify and delete
session and sample data
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
301
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Modify own & other user accounts
Modify own account only
Change the Lab Profile
Manage sample and patient information
Viewing the User List
The List User option displays a list of all users currently in the database, both active and retired. You can
look up and select user profiles.
1. From the Main Menu, select Profile > List User.
2. Type in a name and click Search to search for current users.
3. Double-click to the left of a user entry to view the profile.
4. Click Close to return to the main menu.
Adding New Users
Supervisors can add new supervisor or technician level users. Technicians cannot add new users. Fields
marked with an (*) are required.
1. From the Main Menu, select Profile > List User.
2. Click Add User to add a new user.
3. Enter new user information.
4. Select the Active check box under the Role field to activate the user account.
Note:
If this is a lab tech profile and you want to allow reference file update and/or data
management privileges for this user, select the appropriate check boxes.
5. Click Save to save the new user information and return to the main menu, or click Close to
discard changes and return to the main menu without saving.
Editing User Profiles
Supervisors can edit the user profile of any user. Technicians can only edit their own profiles. Fields
marked with an asterisk (*) are required.
1. To edit your own profile, select Profile > My Profile.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
302
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
2. To select from a list of users to edit, select Profile > List User and double-click to the left of a
user to select that profile.
3. Edit user information.
Click Save to save user information and return to the Main Menu.
4. Click Close to discard changes and return to the Main Menu without saving.
Changing Passwords
Supervisors can change passwords for any user, but they must have the user’s old password. Technicians
can change only their own passwords.
1. From the Main Menu, select Profile > My Profile.
2. In the user profile, click the Change Password button.
3. Enter the current and new passwords.
4. Click the Save Password button to change the password. Or, click Close to close and return to
the main menu without changing the password.
Resetting Passwords
If a user loses or forgets their password, HLA Fusion can reset the password. The new password is the
same as the user’s user name. Only Supervisors can reset a user’s password.
1. From the Main Menu, select Profile> List User and select a user.
2. In the user profile, click the Reset Password button.
3. Click Close to return to the main menu.
Changing User Privileges
Only Supervisors can modify a user’s privilege level.
1. From the main menu, select Profile> List User
2. Double-click to the left of a user to open their profile.
3. In the user profile, select the check box next to either Manage Data or Update Reference
Files, or both, to give the selected user privileges for those activities within the Fusion
application.
4. Click Close to return to the Main Menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
303
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Inactivating Users
Supervisors can inactivate users who are no longer using HLA Fusion. User information is still stored in
the database, but the user is not able to log into the program.
1. From the Main Menu, select Profiles > List User and select a user to edit.
2. Clear the Active check box to deactivate the user.
3. Click Save to save user information and return to the main menu, or click Close to discard
changes and return to the Main Menu without saving.
Note:
If a User ID is still associated with analysis records, the User ID cannot be deleted.
Lab Profile
The Lab Profile menu displays the contact information for your lab, network information used by HLA
Fusion, and NMDP contract lab codes. Most of this information is entered during installation, but can be
updated at any time. Only supervisors can change the Lab Profile.
From the Lab Profile menu you can:

Edit the Lab Profile

Add, edit and remove Lab Codes

Change the Network Path

Change the Email Server Name
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
Lab Profile Information Screen
304
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Editing the Lab Profile
Laboratory information displays on most reports, and includes contact information for your lab. This
information is initially entered during installation, and can be edited any time from the Lab Profile menu.
Fields marked with an asterisk (*) are required.
1. From the main menu, select Profile > Lab Profile.
2. Edit lab profile information.
3. Click Save to save changes and return to the main menu, or click Cancel to return to the main
menu without saving any changes.
Managing Lab Codes
Lab codes are used on NMDP reports to identify contract labs. Multiple lab codes may be entered and
stored in HLA Fusion. You can select the lab code you wish to use when creating an NMDP report. Only
the first three digits of a lab Code are used on NMDP reports; lab code descriptions are not included on
reports.
1. From the main menu, select Profile > Lab Profile.
Add, edit or delete Lab codes:

Click Add Lab Code to add a new lab code. Enter information into the new row.

Highlight a lab code to be edited. Click Edit Lab Code to edit the lab code.
2. Edit lab code information.
3. Highlight a lab code to be deleted.
4. Click Delete Lab Code to delete the lab code.
5. Click Save to save changes and return to the main menu, or click Cancel to discard changes
and return to the main menu without saving.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
305
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Utilities
HLA Fusion™ uses a variety of reference files for data analysis that need to be updated for new products,
lots and revisions. You can also change many global product settings to customize analysis for your lab,
and you can modify default system settings to reflect your personal or network file system.
Warning:
Always use the latest reference files for analysis. Otherwise, analysis results may not be accurate.
Managing Catalog Reference Files
Catalog reference files contain all of the reaction-specific information needed for analysis, including the
following:

Bead and well specificities

QC information

Cut-off values

Bead and primer information
Each new lot or revision of a product needs its own catalog file for analysis results to be accurate.
Updating Catalog Files from a Local or Network
Drive
Lab supervisors can input new catalog files for use
in analysis when new products, lots, or
File
updates become available. Catalog files are
directory
also available on the One Lambda
tree
download site.
Catalogs
1. From the main or any of the product home
pages, click the [Download] link,
or from the main menu, select
Catalog
O
ptions
Utilities > Update Reference >
Update Reference File.
The Update Reference File dialog
box displays.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
306
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
If your serology information is outdated, or you have not imported it yet, a message like the one shown
below is displayed. If you do not see this type of message, go to the next step. If you see the message, click
OK to open the Serology Import dialog box.
Serology equivalent file notice
Make sure the Catalog option is selected.
2. Using the file directory tree on the left, locate catalog files to be imported.
The number
of catalogs
currently in
your Fusion
database.
Updated &
revised
catalogs
available for
download.
Lists all
available catalogs
Note:
Available catalogs which are
not in your Fusion database.
To determine which catalog is the most recent available, HLA Fusion looks first at the lot
number and then the revision number. An updated lot number gets flagged as the most
recent version of a catalog, even if there is also an update to the revision number of the
previous lot since you last downloaded catalogs.
3. Highlight the files you want to import, or click Select All
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
to select all files listed.
307
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
If you select a catalog to import that is in the old allele format, you are notified with a message. If you do
not see this message, proceed to the next step. If you do see the message, select the translate option you
want to use before going to the next step.
Note:
If you select Yes or Yes All, the software will translate the old allele format into the latest
format. For the Molecular products (LABType or Micro SSP), the software will drop the old
format allele completely if it does not find a matching allele in the new format list. For
Antibody products, if the software does not find a matching allele in the new format, it
keeps the old format allele, but adds a colon.
Translate alleles Option
5. Click Yes, or Yes All to import the selected catalog files.
Note:
Catalog import takes longer when you choose to translate alleles.
6. A confirmation dialog box displays import results, click Close.
7. Click Close to return to the Update Reference menu.
Imported catalog files can be used without restarting Fusion.
Updating Catalog Files from the One Lambda Download Site

Product catalog files are available on the One Lambda download site
(http://download.onelambda.com).
1. From the main or any of the product home pages, click the Download link, or from the main
menu, select Utilities > Update Reference > Update Reference File. The Update
Reference File dialog box displays.
2. Click Auto Update
to open the One Lambda Catalog Updates Selection window.
3. Select the check box next to the files you want to import. Click the plus or minus signs on the file
directory tree, to locate the catalog files for each product. You can also click Select All or
Deselect All to select or clear all the check boxes at once.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
308
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
4. Click Import
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
to import the selected catalog files.
5. When the confirmation dialog box displays import results, click OK.
6. Click Close
and then Yes to return to the Update Reference menu.
Imported catalog files can be used without restarting Fusion.
Note:
You can also click Go to OLI, click the links for the products and catalog files you want to
import, and follow the download instructions.
If Auto Update does not respond, verify your network connectivity and that the URL you set
for One Lambda in Utilities > URLs & Paths is correct.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
309
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Updating Molecular Typing Reference Files
Reference files contain allele code and serology equivalent information used in analysis. It is important
to update them regularly for accurate allele code and serology assignments.
From the Update Reference menu you can download the necessary files:

NMDP codes

Local codes

Serology Equivalent files
Updating NMDP Codes from a Local or Network Drive
The National Marrow Donor Program (NMDP) provides a list of allele codes that can be used in
molecular typing analysis. If you have a current list stored on your local or network drive, use this
procedure to import it so HLA Fusion can access it. The most current NMDP code file is available on the
NMDP download site.
1. From the main or any of the product home pages, click the Download link, or from the main
menu, select Utilities > Update Reference > Update Reference File.
The Update Reference File dialog box displays.
Folder/
Directory
12. Select the NMDP option.
NMDP Code
option
Information
on last
download
and update
Updating NMDP Code
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
310
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
13. Navigate to the NMDP file on a local or network drive, using the Import Directory tree.
4. Click Import NMDP to import the selected file.
5. Click Close to return to the Update Reference menu.
Updating NMDP Files from the NMDP Website
Follow this procedure to import the NMDP list from the NMDP website.
1. From the main or any of the product home pages, click the Download link, or from the main
menu, select Utilities > Update Reference > Update Reference File.
2. The Update Reference File dialog box displays.
3. Select the NMDP option.
4. Click Auto Update, which automatically imports the current NMDP file for use with HLA
Fusion. Or, click Go to NMDP and follow the instructions for downloading an NMDP file from
the website.
Note:
If Auto Update does not respond, verify your network connectivity and that the URL you set
for NMDP in Utilities > URLs & Paths is correct.
Creating a Local Code File
Local code files are created by individual labs; local codes are created to make ambiguous typing
assignments easier to store and read. For example, ambiguities, such as B*1501/1501N/1502, can be
condensed with a code to B*15AB for simpler record keeping.
1. Copy the local code template from the HLA Fusion CD to a local drive.
2. Use a text editor to edit the template and add code definitions.
3. Follow the example format, using a Tab to separate each field, and a slash to separate multiple
values within a field:

letter code <tab> numeric allele extension to which the code applies
4. Save the file as local_code.txt
See the next section, Updating the Local Code File, to import the file.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
311
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Updating the Local Code File
After a Local Code file has been created, it must to be updated in HLA Fusion.
1. From the main or any of the product home pages, click the Download link, or from the main
menu, select Utilities > Update Reference > Update Reference File.
The Update Reference File dialog box displays.
Update Reference File: Local Code
Directory/
Folder tree
Local Code
Option
2. Select the Local Code option.
3. Use the Import Directory tree to locate and select the Local code file to be imported.
4. Click Import Local Code to import the selected file(s).
5. Click Close to return to the Update Reference menu.
Updating Serology Equivalent File from One Lambda Website
The Serology Equivalent file can be auto updated from the One Lambda download site
(http://download.onelambda.com).
1. From the main or any of the product home pages, click the Download link, or from the main
menu, select Utilities > Update Reference > Update Reference File.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
312
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
The Update Reference File dialog box displays.
Update Reference file: Serology Equivalent
Directory/
Folder Tree
Serology
Equivalent
option
2. Select the Serology Equivalent option.
3. Click Auto Update
to open the One Lambda Catalog Updates Selection window.
4. Select the check box next to all files you want to import.
5. Click Import Serology to import the selected files. Catalog files are ready for use without
restarting HLA Fusion.
6. A confirmation dialog box displays import results, click OK.
7. Click Close

and then Yes to return to the Update Reference menu.
If Auto Update does not respond, verify your network connectivity and that the URL you set for
Serological in Utilities > URLs & Paths is correct.
Catalog Management and Information
Archive Catalogs
You can archive catalog files that are no longer used. The catalog information still exists in the database,
but is not included in the list of available catalog files for analysis. Catalog files can also be restored for
use in analysis.
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Update Reference > Catalog
Information/Management.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
313
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Archive Catalog
2. Select the S (select) check box for the catalog files you want to archive, and click Archive
.
3. When a pop-up message displays Data Saved, click OK.
4. Click Close to return to the main menu.
Note:
When you import a new version of a catalog file, the system auto-archives the previous
version.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
314
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Un-Archive Files
Archived catalog files display an A in the Status column when you view the catalog list and the check
box for Show Archived Catalogs is selected.
Archived Catalogs check box
Archive and unarchive catalog files
Place a check mark here and
click the Unarchive button
to unarchive the catalog.
Place a check mark here and
click the Archive button
to archive the catalog.

The letter “A”
indicates that
the catalog
has been
archived.
From the Archive Catalog window, select the check boxes next to the catalogs you want to
unarchive, and click Unarchive.
Viewing Catalog File Information
You can view information about a catalog file and generate a report from the Catalog Information
menu. Catalog files displayed with an A in their Status column have been archived.
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Update Reference >Catalog Management.
2. Click a column header if you want to sort the catalog file list.
3. Click Report to display a printable, exportable report of the currently displayed catalog
information.
Deleting Catalog File Information
You can delete a catalog file from the Catalog Management menu. Catalog files displayed with an A in
their Status column have been archived.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
315
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Update Reference >Catalog
Information/Management.
2. Select the check box next to any catalog you want to delete.
3. Click Delete to remove the catalog information.
Reporting Catalog File Information
You can view and report information about a catalog file and generate a report from the Catalog
Information menu.
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Update Reference >Catalog Management.
2. Click a column header if you want to sort the catalog file list.

(Optional) If you want a report in the old format, select the check box next to Old Format
report.
3. Click Report to display a printable, exportable report of the currently displayed catalog
information.
Associating Product Catalog Files and Luminex Templates
You can associate a catalog file with the Luminex template name used for a specific product. HLA Fusion
automatically associates catalog ID and template names the first time you run the analysis for the
product. After an association has been made, HLA Fusion automatically selects the catalog file associated
with the template used in the CSV file when you start analysis. You can also manually add, remove, or
change associations.
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Catalog Template Association.
Add, remove or modify an association:
2. Add a New Association.
3. Select a catalog file.
4. Type in a new template name, or click Browse to select a Luminex template file (.lxt format) to
associate with the filename.
5. Remove an Association.
6. Select a catalog file.
7. Select a template name and click Remove.
Modify an Association:
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
316
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
1. Select a catalog file.
2. Edit existing template name(s).
3. Click Save to save changes.
4. Click Close to return to the Main Menu
Importing Allele Frequency Files (Demographic Frequency)
You can import allele frequency files to use in analysis based on demographics.
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Update Reference Allele Frequency.
2. Select the Create Demographic Group option.
Allele frequency import
3. Click the browse
button and locate Allele Frequency files.
4. Click Import.
When an Allele Frequency file is successfully imported, the groups it contains are listed in
Demographic Group and Frequency in Database.
5. Click Save.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
317
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
If the header for the column of any allele frequency file you import is empty, the entire column is
not imported into Fusion, regardless of any other data it contains. If columns are duplicated, Fusion
gives you an error message and does not import the allele frequency file.
The data contained in the Allele Frequency file may look similar to this graphic.
Updating Allele Frequency Files (Demographic Frequency)
You can modify allele frequency files before using them in analysis based on demographics.
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Update Reference >Allele Frequency.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
318
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Allele frequency import
2. Select the Update Alleles and Frequencies option.
3. Click the browse
button and locate the Allele Frequency file you want to update.
4. Double-click on the file, or click Open in the browser window.
5. Do any or all of the following to modify the file:

Add/delete alleles

Delete existing demographics

Change the allele frequencies

Convert allele format
6. Click Translate Alleles
7. Click Update.
8. Click Close.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
319
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Managing CREG List Information
You can modify existing CREG lists or create new ones for use in PRA and Single Antigen LABScreen,
FlowPRA, LAT, or LCT analysis. Take the following steps to create or modify a CREG list:
1. Select Utilities > Update Reference > CREG Information Management.
The CREG Management window displays.
CREG Management screen
2. Select an existing CREG group from the CREG Type drop-down list, or Enter a name for a new
group in the New CREG Type field.
Do one of the following:

Enter new or modify existing information in the Group Name and/or Group Detail fields
and click Save.

Highlight a row of existing group information, and click Delete Group.
3. When you have completed CREG group creation or modification, click Close.
Note:
Please verify your data before saving, and please do not mix alleles with the older
nomenclature format with alleles in the newer format within the same CREG table.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
320
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Changing Product Configuration Settings
Changes to product analysis settings apply only to samples not previously analyzed. Previously analyzed
samples must be re-analyzed for the changes to be applied.
From the Product Configuration menu you can

Change Micro SSP product configuration

Change LABType product configuration

Change product settings for LABScreen Mixed analysis

Change antibody screening analysis settings

Change default negative serum values for LABScreen analysis
Changing Molecular Product Configuration
Changes to LABType and Micro SSP analysis settings apply only to samples that have not yet been saved
or confirmed. To change analysis settings for previously saved or confirmed samples, you must change
the settings from the product analysis window and re-analyze the sample.
1. From the LABType or Micro SSP home page click Edit, or select Utilities > Molecular
Product Configuration >Molecular Analysis Configuration from the HLA Fusion main
menu.
2. Select either LABType or Micro SSP from the Product Type drop-down menu.
LABType and Micro SSP Configuration settings
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
321
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
3. Change configuration values as needed.

Save Force 1 Pairs stores force 1 pairs in the database during analysis. The force 1 pairs are
also displayed in reports that contain this information.

Allow Auto-Accept All can only be selected by someone with Supervisor user privileges,
and allows you to select a button on LABType session summary to accept the batch analysis
results for all samples.

Computer Assigned Serology can only be selected by someone with Supervisor user
privileges, and automatically populates LABType and Micro SSP analysis serology assignment
fields, as well as stores results in the database. If this is selected, a warning message displays
as a reminder that the assignments are estimates, and should not be accepted without
verification.
Serology auto-assignment warning
4. Click Save
5. Click Close
to save changes.
to return to the Update Reference menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
322
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Creating a Combined LABScreen Session Catalog
To run a Class I and Class II combined LABScreen analysis session, create a combined catalog to use for
your session. You must use a Class I catalog file and a Class II catalog file that have the same positive and
negative control beads, but do not have any other beads in common.
1. Select Utilities > Antibody Product Configuration from the HLA Fusion main menu.
2. Click Create Combined Products to open the Combined Products menu.
Combine LABScreen catalog files
3. Select the first product catalog to be combined and click
4. Select the second product catalog to combine and click
.
The new catalog file name appears at the bottom of the selection menu.
5. Click Save

to save the new combined catalog file for use in LABScreen analysis.
Optional: Click Clear to reset the selections and start over.
6. Click Close
.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
323
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Changing LABScreen Default Negative Serum
Negative control sera can be adjusted or added for each product or lot. You can change the trimmed
mean fluorescence value for each bead individually.
1. Select Utilities > Antibody Product Configuration from the HLA Fusion main menu.
2. Click Set Default Negative Serum Value to open the Default Negative Serum Value screen.
Setting default negative serum value
3. Select a catalog file.
4. Select an existing negative serum, or
5. Select Add New NS Name from the pull-down menu to
create a new negative serum.
6. Type a name for the new negative serum into the Current
NS field.
7. Edit Default NS values for the desired beads.
8. Click Save to save the changes.
9. Click Close.
LABScreen Mixed Product configuration
Changing LABScreen Mixed Product Configuration
You can change LABScreen Mixed analysis positive and negative
threshold settings for each product or lot. The new cutoff threshold
values are used in every analysis session for that product or lot.
1. From the LABScreen home page click Edit, or select
Utilities > Antibody Product Configuration from the
HLA Fusion main menu.
2. Click Set Mixed Product Configuration to open the
LABScreen Mixed Configuration menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
324
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
3. Select a product catalog from the Catalog ID drop-down list.
4. Edit threshold values. For LABScreen Mixed catalogs, the threshold values can be set at the bead
level.
5. Click Save
6. Click Close
to save values.
.
Changing Antibody Screening Analysis Configuration
Changes in the antibody screening analysis configuration are made by product type and apply only to
sessions analyzed after the changes were made.
1. From the LABScreen, FlowPRA, LAT or LCT home page click [Edit], or select Utilities >
Antibody Product Configuration from the HLA Fusion main menu.
2. Click Set Analysis Configuration to open the Analysis Configuration Settings menu.
3. Select a product type from the Product Type drop-down list.
4. Change values as needed.
5. Click Save to save values.
6. Click Close.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
325
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Importing NS Files
Negative Serum (NS) files can be imported to be referenced during analysis.
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Antibody Product Configuration.
2. Click NS File Import to open the NS File Import menu.
NS File Import
3. Click the browse
button to locate and select NS files.
4. Click Import NS File.
When an NS file is successfully imported, it is listed in Existing NS Files.
5. Click Close to return to the Update Reference menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
326
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Choosing General Settings
You can set a number of general system settings, including printer defaults and URLs and Paths.
1. Select Utilities > General Settings from the HLA Fusion main menu. The General Settings
dialog box is displayed.
Fusion General Settings
2. Use the drop-down menus, or select check boxes to make your selections on this dialog box.
3. When you have made all of your selections, click Save.
Printer Defaults
From the Printer Setup tab on the General Settings dialog box, you can select settings such as default
printer and paper size, which will be in place when you print reports or do a print screen.
1. Select Utilities > General Settings, and click the Printer Setup tab.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
327
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Printer Setup
2. Select from the following options for both the Print Screen and Print Report panels of the
dialog box:

If you want to see a print preview or print report dialog each time you print, make sure the Yes
option is selected. Otherwise, select No.

If you do not want to select a printer each time you print, select the default printer and paper
size from the drop-down menus.
Note:
This default printer configuration may be overwritten by the specific page properties of
certain reports.
3. Click Save
.
Setting HLA Fusion Default URLs and Directory Paths
The URLs & Paths option under the General Settings menu allows you to set the default URLs for OLI
and NMDP websites to download reference and catalog files, and product updates. This option also
allows you to set the directory path where HLA Fusion, by default, stores catalogs, session/batch files,
reports, etc. Modifying URLs or paths ahead of time allows you to avoid having to browse for files each
time you need them.
1. Click [Edit]on the right side of the General Configuration panel of the HLA Fusion default home
page, or select Utilities > General Settings from the HLA Fusion main menu.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
328
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Select the URLs tab or the Paths tab.
URL’s Tab
Paths Tab
2. Enter a URL and verify it works by clicking
.For paths, use the browse button
to locate
the directory you want to use for the specified purpose (e.g., where you want to store reports when
they are generated).
3. Click Save
.
Activating Products
The Products Selection option on the Utilities
menu allows you to activate or de-activate the
various OLI analysis products that may be used
with HLA Fusion.
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities >
Products Selection.
Select or clear the check box next to the
product(s) you wish to activate or de-activate.
Click OK
.
Select/Activate products
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
329
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Software Validation
The HLA Fusion software has functionality to help with the validation process required by Labs, Clinics,
and hospitals seeking to comply with GCP, GLP and GMP. Validation of the HLA Fusion software for
your lab environment for regulatory or performance reasons, can be automated by using the IQ
(Installation Qualification) and OQ (Operational Qualification)options from the Utilities > Validation
menu. Your lab may choose to run these as a standard regulatory validation process, to help troubleshoot
issues, or to provide information to prepare for a software upgrade.
IQ (Installation Qualification)
The IQ process assists you with installation qualification of HLA Fusion software by providing a built-in
function. Once the Installation qualification completes, a results report is generated, which you can save,
print or export to Excel.
If your IQ results concern you, export them to an Excel file and e-mail the file to OLI
customer support.
Note:
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Validation > IQ.
The validation test runs. When it is complete, a report is displayed, with the following categories of
data:

Systems Information (e.g., operating system)

Environment (e.g., directory path where the HLA Fusion program files are stored)

URLs (e.g., the URL for the catalog download site)

Database Information (e.g., name of the database)

Number and types of files installed (e.g., dll)

Lab Information (e.g., name and address of your lab)

Analysis Configuration for each product (e.g., low bead count for LABType)
2. Choose to save the report, preview it, print it, or export it to Excel.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
330
One Lambda, Inc. | A Thermo Fisher Scientific Brand
HLA Fusion Version 4.0 User Manual
Example IQ Report
Typical IQ Report
IQ (Installation Qualification)
The IQ process assists you with the installation qualification by providing a built in functionality. This
can be performed only if you have completed the IQ process as explained above. The installation
qualification goes through a series of QA process to analyze pre-loaded batch and catalog, and compares
them with pre-defined results.
Once the Installation validation completes, a results report is generated that you can choose to save, print
or export to Excel. If the results concern you, export them to an Excel file and email this file to OLI
Customer Support.

From the Main Menu, select Utilities > > Validation > Installation(IQ).
The validation test runs. When it is complete, a report is displayed, with data regarding the operation of
HLA Fusion in your computer environment.
HLAF-MAN-v4.0.0-EN-00, Rev 0 (HLA Fusion User Manual v4.0)
331
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement